OptiX Metro1000 V300R007C02 Product Description V2.0(20101020)
description
Transcript of OptiX Metro1000 V300R007C02 Product Description V2.0(20101020)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemV300R007C02
Product Description
Issue 02
Date 2010-10-20
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions that correspond to this documentation.
Product Name Product Version
OptiX 155/622H V300R007C02
iManager U2000 V100R002C01
Intended AudienceThis document describes the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) Optical Transmission System(hereinafter referred to as the OptiX 155/622H) in the aspects such as equipment, board,protection, maintenance, and management to enable a reader to have a comprehensiveunderstanding of the product. The OptiX 155/622H is managed by the transport networkmanagement system (hereinafter referred to as the NMS).
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineersl Data configuration engineerl System maintenance engineer
Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.
GUI ConventionsConvention Meaning
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles arein boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative.Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Based on Product Version V300R007C02This document of the V300R007C02 version is of the second release. The updated contents areas follows.
l This document specifies when to use packet/TDM domain and when to use packet/TDMmode.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-08-13) Based on Product Version V300R007C02This document of the V300R007C02 version is of the first release. The updated contents are asfollows.
l The description about license control is added.l The description about the PW APS protection is added.
Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-20) Based on Product Version V300R007C00This document is the second release of the OptiX 155/622H V300R007C00 version. The newor modified contents are as follows:
About This Document
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
l The number of LAGs supported by the equipment is changed to eight.
Updates in Issue 01 (2009-08-25) Based on Product Version V300R007C00This document is the initial release of the OptiX 155/622H V300R007C00. The new or modifiedcontents are as follows:
l The description about the CXP board is added.l The introduction to the packet service and its related contents are added, such as the packet
service access capability, interface types, networking modes, protection schemes, MPLSOAM, packet system performance, and the relative standards of the packet service.
l The structure of the “Function” topic is optimized, that is, the packet domain and TDMdomain are introduced respectively.
l The traditional SDH clock synchronization and Ethernet synchronization are describedrespectively.
l The “Glossary” and the “Acronyms and Abbreviations” are updated.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Product Positioning and Product Features ...........................................................................1-11.1 Introduction to the OptiX 155/622H...............................................................................................................1-21.2 Network Position.............................................................................................................................................1-21.3 Product Features..............................................................................................................................................1-3
2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................2-12.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity of the TDM Mode..........................................................................................2-22.1.2 Exchange Capacities..............................................................................................................................2-22.1.3 Access Capacity (TDM Mode)..............................................................................................................2-22.1.4 Slot Access Capacity (Packet Mode).....................................................................................................2-3
2.2 Service Access Capacities...............................................................................................................................2-32.2.1 Service Access Capability on the TDM mode.......................................................................................2-32.2.2 Service Access Capacity (Packet Mode)................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Interface Types................................................................................................................................................2-42.3.1 Types of the Service Interfaces on the TDM Mode...............................................................................2-52.3.2 Types of the Service Interfaces on the Packet Mode.............................................................................2-62.3.3 Management and Auxiliary Interfaces...................................................................................................2-6
2.4 Protection Scheme...........................................................................................................................................2-72.5 Clock and Time Synchronization....................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.1 Clock Synchronization...........................................................................................................................2-92.5.2 Synchronous Ethernet Clock..................................................................................................................2-92.5.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Clock Synchronization.................................................................................................2-11
2.6 License Control.............................................................................................................................................2-12
3 Product Architecture..................................................................................................................3-13.1 Hardware Structure.........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 Chassis....................................................................................................................................................3-33.1.2 Slot Allocation and Interfaces................................................................................................................3-43.1.3 Board Type.............................................................................................................................................3-9
3.2 SDH Unit.......................................................................................................................................................3-113.2.1 STM-16 Optical Interface Board OI16D..............................................................................................3-123.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interface Board OI4/OI4D..........................................................................................3-12
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Contents
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
3.2.3 STM-1 Optical Interface Board OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O...................................................................3-133.2.4 Single-Fiber STM-1 Interface Board SB2D/SB2L/SB2R...................................................................3-143.2.5 STM-1 Electrical Interface Board SDE/SLE.......................................................................................3-16
3.3 PDH Unit.......................................................................................................................................................3-173.3.1 E1 Electrical Interface Boards SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T...............................................3-173.3.2 E1/T1 Compliant Electrical Interface Board SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T...............................3-183.3.3 E3/T3 Electrical Interface Board PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T............................................3-19
3.4 Data Unit.......................................................................................................................................................3-203.4.1 Ethernet Interface Boards ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol).......................3-213.4.2 Ethernet Transparent Transmission Boards EFT/ELT2/EGT Boards (Supporting the GFP Protocol).......................................................................................................................................................................3-233.4.3 Ethernet Switching Boards EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol)...........................3-253.4.4 ATM Interface Board AIUD/AIUQ.....................................................................................................3-273.4.5 Nx64kbit/s Interface Board N64/N64Q/FP2D.....................................................................................3-293.4.6 Single Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line Interface Board SHLQ........................................3-303.4.7 Tone and Data Access Board TDA......................................................................................................3-31
3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board SCB...........................................................................................3-323.6 Integrated Mixed-Service Processing Board CXP(Packet Mode)................................................................3-333.7 Environment Monitoring Unit EMU.............................................................................................................3-363.8 Power Converter System UPM.....................................................................................................................3-37
3.8.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................3-373.8.2 UPM Power Converter Box.................................................................................................................3-383.8.3 Storage Battery.....................................................................................................................................3-39
3.9 Software Architecture...................................................................................................................................3-403.9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................................3-403.9.2 Communication Protocols....................................................................................................................3-413.9.3 Board Software.....................................................................................................................................3-413.9.4 NE Software.........................................................................................................................................3-423.9.5 Network Management System.............................................................................................................3-43
4 Data Features...............................................................................................................................4-14.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................4-24.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................4-64.1.3 Protection...............................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................4-114.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................4-124.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................4-124.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................4-15
4.3 DDN Features................................................................................................................................................4-164.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................4-164.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................4-174.3.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................4-18
Contents
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
5 Packet Feature ............................................................................................................................5-15.1 MPLS.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Background............................................................................................................................................ 5-25.1.2 Basic Concepts.......................................................................................................................................5-25.1.3 System Structure.................................................................................................................................... 5-45.1.4 Capability of Supporting the MPLS Technology...................................................................................5-4
5.2 Functions.........................................................................................................................................................5-55.3 Application......................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.1 Ethernet Service..................................................................................................................................... 5-75.3.2 CES Service............................................................................................................................................5-9
5.4 Protection......................................................................................................................................................5-10
6 Protection.....................................................................................................................................6-16.1 Equipment-Level Protection........................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Input Unit.............................................................................................6-26.1.2 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions.......................................................................6-26.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (TDM Mode)............................................................................ 6-36.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode)...........................................................................6-4
6.2 Network-Level Protection...............................................................................................................................6-46.2.1 SDH Service Protection......................................................................................................................... 6-56.2.2 Ethernet Service Protection....................................................................................................................6-66.2.3 ATM Service Protection.........................................................................................................................6-66.2.4 LPT Protection....................................................................................................................................... 6-66.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection Schemes.................................................................................... 6-86.2.6 PW APS Protection..............................................................................................................................6-12
7 Product and Application Scenarios........................................................................................7-17.1 Basic Networking Mode..................................................................................................................................7-27.2 Typical Networking Modes on the Packet Domain........................................................................................7-27.3 Hybrid Networking with the OptiX PTN Equipment..................................................................................... 7-4
8 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................8-18.1 DCN Management...........................................................................................................................................8-28.2 Network Management.....................................................................................................................................8-48.3 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance...................................................................................................8-48.4 Power and Environment Monitoring...............................................................................................................8-58.5 Power Consumption Control ..........................................................................................................................8-58.6 Equipment Upgrade.........................................................................................................................................8-6
9 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................9-19.1 General Specifications of the Equipment........................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 System Specifications............................................................................................................................ 9-29.1.2 Transmission Performance.....................................................................................................................9-29.1.3 Protection Performance..........................................................................................................................9-39.1.4 Environmental Specifications................................................................................................................ 9-5
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Contents
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............................................................................................................9-69.2 Specifications of Packet System Performance................................................................................................9-69.3 Specifications of Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................9-9
9.3.1 SDH Optical Interface............................................................................................................................9-99.3.2 Ethernet Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................9-139.3.3 Colored optical interfaces.....................................................................................................................9-149.3.4 Wavelength Configurations..................................................................................................................9-15
9.4 Specifications of the Electrical Interface.......................................................................................................9-169.4.1 PDH Electrical Interface......................................................................................................................9-169.4.2 DDN Interface......................................................................................................................................9-179.4.3 Ethernet Electrical Interface.................................................................................................................9-18
9.5 Specifications of the Auxiliary Interfaces.....................................................................................................9-189.5.1 Specifications of the Clock Interface...................................................................................................9-199.5.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance...........................................................................................9-199.5.3 64 kbit/s Interface.................................................................................................................................9-209.5.4 RS-232 Interface..................................................................................................................................9-209.5.5 RS-422 Interface..................................................................................................................................9-219.5.6 Orderwire Interface..............................................................................................................................9-21
9.6 Specifications of Ethernet Features...............................................................................................................9-219.7 Safety Certification.......................................................................................................................................9-229.8 Requirements for the Environment...............................................................................................................9-23
9.8.1 Environment for Storage......................................................................................................................9-239.8.2 Environment for Transportation...........................................................................................................9-259.8.3 Environment for Operation..................................................................................................................9-28
9.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board..........................................................................................9-30
10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development.................................................................10-110.1 Energy Saving.............................................................................................................................................10-210.2 Sustainable Development............................................................................................................................10-2
11 Standard Compliance............................................................................................................11-111.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................................11-211.2 IEEE Standards...........................................................................................................................................11-411.3 IETF Standards............................................................................................................................................11-511.4 Environmental Standards............................................................................................................................11-511.5 Safety Compliance Standards......................................................................................................................11-611.6 Protection Standards....................................................................................................................................11-611.7 Relative Standards of the Packet Mode.......................................................................................................11-6
A Glossary and Acronyms..........................................................................................................A-1A.1 Numerics........................................................................................................................................................A-3A.2 A....................................................................................................................................................................A-3A.3 B....................................................................................................................................................................A-5A.4 C....................................................................................................................................................................A-6
Contents
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
A.5 D....................................................................................................................................................................A-9A.6 E...................................................................................................................................................................A-10A.7 F...................................................................................................................................................................A-12A.8 G..................................................................................................................................................................A-13A.9 H..................................................................................................................................................................A-14A.10 I..................................................................................................................................................................A-15A.11 J..................................................................................................................................................................A-16A.12 L.................................................................................................................................................................A-16A.13 M................................................................................................................................................................A-17A.14 N................................................................................................................................................................A-19A.15 O................................................................................................................................................................A-20A.16 P.................................................................................................................................................................A-21A.17 Q................................................................................................................................................................A-23A.18 R................................................................................................................................................................A-23A.19 S.................................................................................................................................................................A-25A.20 T.................................................................................................................................................................A-28A.21 U................................................................................................................................................................A-29A.22 V................................................................................................................................................................A-30A.23 W...............................................................................................................................................................A-30
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Contents
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
Figures
Figure 1-1 Front view of the OptiX 155/622H.....................................................................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Rare view of the OptiX 155/622H......................................................................................................1-2Figure 1-3 Application of the OptiX 155/622H in a transmission network.........................................................1-3Figure 2-1 Access Capacities of the slots on the OptiX 155/622H......................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 Access capacity when the CXP board is used....................................................................................2-3Figure 2-3 Networking diagram of the synchronous Ethernet technology........................................................2-10Figure 2-4 Networking of the time synchronization application........................................................................2-12Figure 3-1 Equipment structure of the OptiX 155/622H.....................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Slot layout of the OptiX 155/622H.....................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-3 System architecture of the OptiX 155/622H....................................................................................3-10Figure 3-4 Application of the SB2R and SB2L boards......................................................................................3-16Figure 3-5 Composition of the UPM..................................................................................................................3-37Figure 3-6 Appearance of the power converter box...........................................................................................3-38Figure 3-7 Rear view of the power converter box..............................................................................................3-38Figure 3-8 Storage battery box...........................................................................................................................3-39Figure 3-9 Storage battery tray...........................................................................................................................3-40Figure 3-10 Software architecture......................................................................................................................3-41Figure 4-1 PORT-based EPL service...................................................................................................................4-6Figure 4-2 PORT-shared EVPL service...............................................................................................................4-7Figure 4-3 VLAN ID-based EVPL service..........................................................................................................4-7Figure 4-4 QinQ-based EVPL service..................................................................................................................4-7Figure 4-5 EPLAN service...................................................................................................................................4-8Figure 4-6 EVPLAN service................................................................................................................................4-9Figure 4-7 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment by using LCAS.............................................................................4-10Figure 4-8 Protection for the virtual concatenation group through LCAS.........................................................4-10Figure 4-9 Application of bandwidth-exclusive ATM services.........................................................................4-14Figure 4-10 VP/VC-Ring...................................................................................................................................4-15Figure 5-1 Encapsulation structure of the label ...................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Encapsulation location of the labels in a packet ................................................................................5-3Figure 5-3 Example of E-Line service.................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-4 Example of E-Aggr service................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-5 Example of E1 CES service..............................................................................................................5-10Figure 6-1 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection....................................................................................................6-6
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Figures
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
Figure 6-2 Point-to-point LPT..............................................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-3 Point-to-multipoint LPT.....................................................................................................................6-8Figure 6-4 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection..............................................................................................................6-9Figure 6-5 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 Protection..............................................................................................................6-9Figure 6-6 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection...............................................................................6-13Figure 6-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection................................................................................6-13Figure 7-1 Typical networking mode on the packet domain................................................................................7-3Figure 7-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment.....................................7-4
Figures
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Tables
Table 2-1 Services supported by the OptiX 155/622H and the access capability for each type of service on theTDM mode............................................................................................................................................................2-3Table 2-2 Service access capacity of the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode)..........................................................2-4Table 2-3 Maximum number of services in the two forms supported by the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode)...............................................................................................................................................................................2-4Table 2-4 Types of service interfaces provided by the OptiX 155/622H on the TDM mode..............................2-5Table 2-5 Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces and types of the interfaces supported by the OptiX155/622H on the packet mode...............................................................................................................................2-6Table 2-6 Types of the management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H......................2-6Table 2-7 Equipment-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H............................................2-7Table 2-8 Network-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H...............................................2-8Table 3-1 SDH processing boards........................................................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 PDH boards..........................................................................................................................................3-5Table 3-3 Data boards...........................................................................................................................................3-7Table 3-4 Packet boards.......................................................................................................................................3-8Table 3-5 Cross-connect and system control boards............................................................................................3-9Table 3-6 Auxiliary boards...................................................................................................................................3-9Table 3-7 Power supply boards............................................................................................................................3-9Table 3-8 Boards and functions of each unit......................................................................................................3-10Table 3-9 Functions of the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q and SL1O boards.....................................................................3-13Table 3-10 Functions of the SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards............................................................................3-15Table 3-11 Functions of the SDE and SLE boards.............................................................................................3-16Table 3-12 Functions of the SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D and PD2T boards...........................................3-17Table 3-13 Functions of the SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards.................................................3-19Table 3-14 Functions of the PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards...........................................3-20Table 3-15 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards.....................................................................3-21Table 3-16 Functions of the EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards................................................................................3-23Table 3-17 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards.....................................................................3-25Table 3-18 ATM service types and traffic types................................................................................................3-28Table 3-19 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards..............................................................................3-29Table 3-20 Transmission distances of the audio interface and data interface on the TDA board......................3-32Table 3-21 Functional features of the CXP board..............................................................................................3-34Table 4-1 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards.........................................................................4-2Table 4-2 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EFT, EGS, EFSC, ELT2, and EGT boards...........................................4-3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Tables
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
Table 4-3 Functions of the AIUD and AIUQ boards......................................................................................... 4-12Table 4-4 ATM service types and traffic types..................................................................................................4-13Table 4-5 Classification of ATM protection schemes........................................................................................4-15Table 4-6 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards................................................................................ 4-17Table 5-1 MPLS technical features supported by the OptiX 1555/622H.............................................................5-4Table 5-2 MPLS performance indexes supported by the OptiX 1555/622H.......................................................5-5Table 5-3 Functional features of the CXP board..................................................................................................5-5Table 6-1 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board ..............................................................................6-3Table 6-2 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board ..............................................................................6-4Table 6-3 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes..................................................... 6-10Table 6-4 Parameters of PW APS protection.....................................................................................................6-14Table 8-1 DCC resources allocation modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................................8-3Table 9-1 Weight, dimensions and power consumption......................................................................................9-2Table 9-2 Transmission performance...................................................................................................................9-3Table 9-3 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................9-3Table 9-4 MSP ring parameters............................................................................................................................9-4Table 9-5 SNCP parameters.................................................................................................................................9-4Table 9-6 Environment specifications for long-term operation...........................................................................9-5Table 9-7 Specifications of the electromagnetic compatibility test......................................................................9-6Table 9-8 Functional features of the CXP board..................................................................................................9-6Table 9-9 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface......................................................................................9-9Table 9-10 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface .................................................................................9-11Table 9-11 Specifications of the STM-16optical interface ................................................................................9-12Table 9-12 Permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface............................................................9-13Table 9-13 Bit rate error tolerance at the optical output interface......................................................................9-13Table 9-14 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.............................................9-14Table 9-15 Performance specifications of the GE optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H...........................9-15Table 9-16 Wavelength configurations of the GE colored optical interfaces.................................................... 9-15Table 9-17 Bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface..................................................................9-16Table 9-18 Permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface......................................................................9-17Table 9-19 Permitted Frequency Deviation at the electrical input interface......................................................9-17Table 9-20 Anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface........................................................... 9-17Table 9-21 Specifications of DDN interfaces.....................................................................................................9-17Table 9-22 Specifications of the electrical interfaces.........................................................................................9-18Table 9-23 Specifications of the clock interface................................................................................................ 9-19Table 9-24 Specifications of the clock interface over the synchronous Ethernet...............................................9-19Table 9-25 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................9-19Table 9-26 Timing and synchronization performance of IEEE 1588 V2 clock synchronization...................... 9-20Table 9-27 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface...........................................................................................9-20Table 9-28 Specifications of the RS-232 interface.............................................................................................9-20Table 9-29 Specifications of the RS-422 interface.............................................................................................9-21Table 9-30 Specifications of the orderwire interface......................................................................................... 9-21
Tables
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-31 Test specifications of the single-port 10M bidirectional full-duplex feature...................................9-22Table 9-32 Test specifications of the single-port 100M bidirectional full-duplex feature.................................9-22Table 9-33 Safety certifications..........................................................................................................................9-23Table 9-34 Requirements on the climate for storage..........................................................................................9-24Table 9-35 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the storage environment..............9-24Table 9-36 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the storage environment..................9-25Table 9-37 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the storage environment................................................9-25Table 9-38 Requirements on the climate for transportation...............................................................................9-26Table 9-39 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the transportation environment.............................................................................................................................................................................9-26Table 9-40 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the transportation environment.......9-27Table 9-41 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the transportation environment.....................................9-27Table 9-42 Requirements on the temperature and relative humidity.................................................................9-28Table 9-43 Other requirements on the climate...................................................................................................9-28Table 9-44 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the operation environment..........9-29Table 9-45 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the operation environment..............9-29Table 9-46 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the operation environment............................................9-30Table 9-47 Power consumption and weight of each board................................................................................9-30Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations..................................................................................................................11-2Table 11-2 IEEE standards.................................................................................................................................11-4Table 11-3 IETF standards.................................................................................................................................11-5Table 11-4 Environmental standards .................................................................................................................11-5Table 11-5 Safety compliance standards............................................................................................................11-6Table 11-6 Protection standards.........................................................................................................................11-6Table 11-7 Relative standards of the packet mode and their description ..........................................................11-6
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Tables
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
1 Product Positioning and Product Features
About This Chapter
The OptiX 155/622H is a type of STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 case-shaped equipment developed byHuawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereafter referred to as Huawei). The OptiX 155/622H is mainlyused at the access layer of metropolitan area networks (MANs) and local transmission networks,with the features of simple architecture and high integration.
1.1 Introduction to the OptiX 155/622HThe OptiX 155/622H is new-generation optical transmission equipment, which is developed byHuawei for the access layer.
1.2 Network PositionThe OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can be used at the access layerof metropolitan area networks (MANs) and local transmission networks to access VIP privatelines, wireless base stations, and digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAMs).
1.3 Product FeaturesThe OptiX 155/622H features simple architecture and high integration. It supports the TDM andpacket domains and therefore can be interconnected with the packet switching equipment. Inaddition, it supports circuit emulation service (CES) services, which realizes direct access of E1services on the packet domain.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 1 Product Positioning and Product Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
1.1 Introduction to the OptiX 155/622HThe OptiX 155/622H is new-generation optical transmission equipment, which is developed byHuawei for the access layer.
The OptiX 155/622H is a type of case-shaped equipment. The dimensions of the chassis are:436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H). Except for the power supply module and certainservice boards, the cross-connect unit, clock unit, and orderwire units are integrated into theSCB board. Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the appearance of the OptiX 155/622H.
Figure 1-1 Front view of the OptiX 155/622H
Figure 1-2 Rare view of the OptiX 155/622H
1.2 Network PositionThe OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can be used at the access layerof metropolitan area networks (MANs) and local transmission networks to access VIP privatelines, wireless base stations, and digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAMs).
In the case of Ethernet services, the OptiX 155/622H supports transmitting services on thefollowing two domains on a network: the traditional time division multiplexing (TDM) domainand the packet transport network domain.
In the case of Ethernet services on the packet domain, the OptiX 155/622H provides a small-scale convergence function. Specifically, the equipment converges services from multiple FEports into one GE port.
In the case that the TDM domain and the packet domain are supported on the same network, asmooth migration from the TDM network to the packet network can be achieved.
Figure 1-3 shows the application of the OptiX 155/622H in a network.
1 Product Positioning and Product Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 1-3 Application of the OptiX 155/622H in a transmission network
Backbone layer
Convergence layer
Access layer
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX 155/622H
OptiX OSN 500 OptiX OSN 500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX 155/622H
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 7500
1.3 Product FeaturesThe OptiX 155/622H features simple architecture and high integration. It supports the TDM andpacket domains and therefore can be interconnected with the packet switching equipment. Inaddition, it supports circuit emulation service (CES) services, which realizes direct access of E1services on the packet domain.
Simple Architecture and High IntegrationThe OptiX 155/622H is a type of case-shaped equipment. The dimensions of the chassis are:436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H). Except for the power supply module and certainservice boards, the cross-connect unit, clock unit, and orderwire units are integrated into theSCB board.
Dual-Domain Architecture and Multi-Service TransmissionThe OptiX 155/622H supports service bearing on the time division multiplexing (TDM) domainand the packet transport network domain. With dual-domain networking, the OptiX 155/622Hachieves smooth evolution from TDM network to PSN.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 1 Product Positioning and Product Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
Support for the CES Technology and Flexible NetworkingThe OptiX 155/622H supports the CES technology. With the CES technology, the OptiX155/622H can directly access E1 TDM services to the pure packet domain. In this manner, theTDM domain smoothly evolves into the packet domain.
1 Product Positioning and Product Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
2 Functions and Features
About This Chapter
The OptiX 155/622H provides the features of the traditional optical network equipment andsupports various network-level protection schemes and NMS monitoring.
2.1 CapacityCapacities are classified in to the cross-connect capacity and the access capacity.
2.2 Service Access CapacitiesThe service processing capacities of the OptiX 155/622H include the service access capacity.
2.3 Interface TypesThe external interfaces of the OptiX 155/622H include the service interfaces, and managementand auxiliary interfaces.
2.4 Protection SchemeThe OptiX 155/622H provides the equipment-level protection schemes, and the comprehensivenetwork-level protection schemes for multiple types of services.
2.5 Clock and Time SynchronizationThe OptiX 155/622H supports the tracking of various types of clock sources and supports theclock synchronization in the SSM management. In addition, the OptiX 155/622H supports highprecision time synchronization, which complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 standard.
2.6 License ControlLicenses include version licenses and feature licenses.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
2.1 CapacityCapacities are classified in to the cross-connect capacity and the access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity of the TDM ModeOn the TDM mode, the cross-connect capacity supported by the OptiX 155/622H is classifiedinto higher order cross-connect capacity and lower order cross-connect capacity.
2.1.2 Exchange CapacitiesOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports service exchange based on the packets.
2.1.3 Access Capacity (TDM Mode)Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots should housecorresponding boards.
2.1.4 Slot Access Capacity (Packet Mode)Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots house correspondingboards.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity of the TDM ModeOn the TDM mode, the cross-connect capacity supported by the OptiX 155/622H is classifiedinto higher order cross-connect capacity and lower order cross-connect capacity.
On the OptiX 155/622H, the cross-connect board SCB supports a higher order cross-connectcapacity of 21.25 Gbit/s (that is, 136x136 VC-4) and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5Gbit/s (that is, 32x32 VC-4).
2.1.2 Exchange CapacitiesOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports service exchange based on the packets.
The exchange capacity of packets supported by the OptiX 155/622H is 8 Gbit/s.
2.1.3 Access Capacity (TDM Mode)Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots should housecorresponding boards.
On the TDM mode, the access capacities of the slots on the OptiX 155/622H are as shown inFigure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Access Capacities of the slots on the OptiX 155/622H
FAN P
OI
SCB :5G(IU5) +32M(IU6)
IU4:622M
IU3:1.25G IU2:1.25G IU1:1.25G
2 Functions and Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
2.1.4 Slot Access Capacity (Packet Mode)Seven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H. Different slots house correspondingboards.
When slot IU4 houses the CXP board on the OptiX 155/622H, the access capacity of each slotis as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Access capacity when the CXP board is used
FAN P
OI
SCB :5G(IU5) +32M(IU6)
CXP:5G
IU3:1.25G IU2:1.25G IU1:1.25G
2.2 Service Access CapacitiesThe service processing capacities of the OptiX 155/622H include the service access capacity.
2.2.1 Service Access Capability on the TDM modeOn the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can beinterconnected with switches, wireless base stations, and Ethernet switches.
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity (Packet Mode)On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports access of the FE services, GE services, andCES services, and can be interconnected with the equipment where the packet feature is enabled.
2.2.1 Service Access Capability on the TDM modeOn the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H can access multiple types of services and can beinterconnected with switches, wireless base stations, and Ethernet switches.
Table 2-1 lists the services that the OptiX 155/622H can access and the access capability foreach type of service on the TDM mode.
Table 2-1 Services supported by the OptiX 155/622H and the access capability for each type ofservice on the TDM mode
Service Type Maximum Access Capability of a Single OptiX 155/622H NE
SDH 16xSTM-1 (o), 6xSTM-1 (e), 8xSTM-4 (o), 2xSTM-16 (o)
PDH 112xE1, 72xE1, 9xE3/T3
Ethernet 24xFE (e), 8xFE (o), 3xGE (o)
DDN service 12xNx64 kbit/s (N ≤ 31), 48xFramed E1, Nx2.4kbit/s (N ≤ 18)
SHDSL 12xSHDSL (E1, Nx64 kbit/s)
ATM 4xSTM-1 ATM
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
Service Type Maximum Access Capability of a Single OptiX 155/622H NE
Audio and data 12xaudio + 4xRS-232 + 4xRS-422
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity (Packet Mode)On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports access of the FE services, GE services, andCES services, and can be interconnected with the equipment where the packet feature is enabled.
On the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H can access the FE and GE services in two serviceforms (that is, E-Line, E-Aggr, and CES).
Table 2-2 lists the service access capacity of the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 2-2 Service access capacity of the OptiX 155/622H (packet mode)
Service Type Maximum Access Capacity of One Set of the Equipment
FE 2xFE (o) + 4xFE (e)
GE 4xGE (o)
Table 2-3 lists the maximum number of services in the two forms supported by the OptiX155/622H.
Table 2-3 Maximum number of services in the two forms supported by the OptiX 155/622H(packet mode)
Service Forms Maximum Number of Services
E-Line 1024
E-Aggr 4
E1 CES 16
2.3 Interface TypesThe external interfaces of the OptiX 155/622H include the service interfaces, and managementand auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Types of the Service Interfaces on the TDM ModeOn the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H provides multiple types of interfaces for SDH services,PDH services, and Ethernet services.
2.3.2 Types of the Service Interfaces on the Packet ModeOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H mainly provides Ethernet service interfaces and E1service interfaces.
2 Functions and Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
2.3.3 Management and Auxiliary InterfacesThe management and auxiliary interfaces include the management interfaces, external clockinterfaces, and alarm interfaces.
2.3.1 Types of the Service Interfaces on the TDM ModeOn the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H provides multiple types of interfaces for SDH services,PDH services, and Ethernet services.
Table 2-4 lists the types of the service interfaces provided by the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 2-4 Types of service interfaces provided by the OptiX 155/622H on the TDM mode
InterfaceType
Description ConnectorType
SDH service STM-1 optical interface, supporting theIe-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 opticalinterface types
SC/LC
STM-1 optical interface, supporting theIe-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 opticalinterface types that use a single fiber fortransmitting and receiving
SC
STM-4 optical interface, supporting theIe-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 opticalinterface types
SC/LC
STM-16 optical interface, supporting theS-16.1 optical interface type
LC
STM-1 electrical interface SMB
PDH service E1/T1 electrical interface 2 mm HMconnector
Framed E1 electrical interface DB78 connector
E3/T3 electrical interface SMB
Ethernet service 10Base-T, 100Base-TX RJ-45
100Base-FX LC
1000Base-SX/LX LC
ATM service STM-1 optical interface LC
Audio and dataservice
RS-232 or RS-422 data and audio interface 2mm HMconnector
DDN service Physical interface complying withmultiple protocols, including V.35, V.24,X.21, RS-449, and EIA-530
2 mm HMconnector
Framed E1 electrical interface 2 mm HMconnector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
InterfaceType
Description ConnectorType
G.SHDSL Single pair high-bit-rate digital subscriberline interface
RJ-11
2.3.2 Types of the Service Interfaces on the Packet ModeOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H mainly provides Ethernet service interfaces and E1service interfaces.
Table 2-5 provides the Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces and types of theinterfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H on the packet mode.
Table 2-5 Ethernet service interfaces and E1 service interfaces and types of the interfacessupported by the OptiX 155/622H on the packet mode
Interface Interface Type ConnectorType
FE 100Base-TX RJ-45
100Base-FX LC
GE 1000Base-SX/LX/VX/ZX LC
E1 75/120 ohms 2 mm HMconnector
2.3.3 Management and Auxiliary InterfacesThe management and auxiliary interfaces include the management interfaces, external clockinterfaces, and alarm interfaces.
Table 2-6 provides the types of the management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX155/622H.
Table 2-6 Types of the management and auxiliary interfaces supported by the OptiX 155/622H
InterfaceType
Description ConnectorType
Clock interface An external clock interface that supportsclock signals. The impedance of theinterface is 120 ohms.The mode can be set to 2048 kbit/s or 2048kHz.
RJ-45
2 Functions and Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
InterfaceType
Description ConnectorType
Time interface A time reference output interface thatsupports 1 pps (that is, second pulse) andtime information. 1 pps and the time serialport use the RS-422 level.
RJ-45
Power supplyinterface
Two-channel -48 V/-60 V DC powersupply interfaceTwo-channel +24 V DC power supplyinterface
Four-core socket
Environmentmonitoringinterface
The EMU board provides:l 12-channel housekeeping signal input
interface and six-channelhousekeeping signal output interface
l One-channel RS-232/RS-422 serialcommunication interface
2 mm HMconnector
The SCB board provides:l Four-channel housekeeping signal
input interfaces and two housekeepingsignal output interfaces
l Four-channel transparent datainterfaces
RJ-45
Managementinterface
One-channel modem interface RJ-45
One-channel NM interface RJ-45
Orderwireinterface
One orderwire phone interface RJ-11
2.4 Protection SchemeThe OptiX 155/622H provides the equipment-level protection schemes, and the comprehensivenetwork-level protection schemes for multiple types of services.
Table 2-7 provides multiple equipment-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX155/622H.
Table 2-7 Equipment-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H
Protected Object Protection Mode
POI/POU board 1+1 hot backup for the power supply
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-7
Protected Object Protection Mode
Abnormal board Power failure protection during softwareloading, overvoltage and undervoltageprotection for power supply, and softwareupgrade protection.
FP2D PPS protection
Ethernet board port (TDM mode) LAG protection
Ethernet board port (packet mode)
Table 2-8 provides multiple network-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX155/622H.
Table 2-8 Network-level protection schemes supported by the OptiX 155/622H
Network Layer Protection Mode
SDH on the TDM mode Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP)
Ring MSP
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)
Protection for inter-ring services
Fiber-shared virtual path protection
Ethernet on the TDM mode Layered protection
Ethernet on the packet mode l MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protectionl MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection
ATM on the TDM mode VP-ring/VC-ring protection
2.5 Clock and Time SynchronizationThe OptiX 155/622H supports the tracking of various types of clock sources and supports theclock synchronization in the SSM management. In addition, the OptiX 155/622H supports highprecision time synchronization, which complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 standard.
2.5.1 Clock SynchronizationThe OptiX 155/622H provides clock functions such as multiple synchronous clock sources andclock management.
2.5.2 Synchronous Ethernet ClockThe OptiX 155/622H supports the synchronous Ethernet clock at the physical layer.
2.5.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Clock SynchronizationThe OptiX 155/622H provides the function of high precision time synchronization, which meetsthe requirement of the equipment for precise time synchronization. The time information is
2 Functions and Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
accessed into the SDH network and is then transmitted to the equipment that requires precisetime, such as NodeB.
2.5.1 Clock SynchronizationThe OptiX 155/622H provides clock functions such as multiple synchronous clock sources andclock management.
The OptiX 155/622H supports the following clock functions:
l Input and output of two external clock sources with an interface impedance of 120 ohms.The 75-ohm interface can be provided by using a converter.
l Line clock source.
l Tributary clock source.
l Non Synchronization Status Message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended SSM protocols.
l Tributary re-timing.
l Three clock working modes: locked, holdover and free-run.
2.5.2 Synchronous Ethernet ClockThe OptiX 155/622H supports the synchronous Ethernet clock at the physical layer.
Concepts and Features
In the case of the physical layer clock synchronization mechanism, clock signals are extractedfrom signals on the physical channel of the transmission link and thus the frequencysynchronization is achieved. The synchronous Ethernet is a synchronization technology that isused to synchronize the clock frequency at the physical layer. The synchronous Ethernet issimilar to the SDH clock. The system can directly extract the clock signal from the serial bitstream on the Ethernet line and transmit the clock signal to each board. In this manner, thetransmission of the clock signal is realized.
The features of the synchronous Ethernet clock are as follows:
l The realization of the synchronous Ethernet clock technology is simple. To be specific, theport can directly extract the physical layer clock and the quality of the clock meets therequirement of the clock source (that is, the clock standard of the synchronous Ethernet).
l The synchronization status information (SSM) is used to indicate the quality level of theclock. The SSM is carried by the specific OAM packet.
l To transmit the synchronous Ethernet clock signal, each network node that the synchronousinformation travels through must support the synchronous Ethernet technology.
Capability of the Synchronous Ethernet Technology
The following boards support the synchronous Ethernet technology on the OptiX 155/622H:
l Ethernet board EFS4
l Integrated mixed-service processing board CXP
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-9
Networking Diagram
The OptiX 155/622H provides synchronous Ethernet interfaces to form a synchronous Ethernetnetwork that can realize Ethernet synchronization at the physical layer. Figure 2-3 shows theapplication of the synchronous Ethernet technology.
Figure 2-3 Networking diagram of the synchronous Ethernet technology
~
PRC
Clock information
RNC
BSC
Node B
OptiX 155/622H/OptiX OSN 1500
FE
TDM domain
Packet domain~ PRC
RNC BSC
OptiX OSN 3500
Convergence/Core layer
Access layer
STM-16/64 ring
10GE ring
STM-1/4 ring
GE ring
The clock signal is transmitted on the synchronous Ethernet as follows:
1. The clock information on the primary reference clock (PRC) or other external clockequipment is transmitted through the external clock interface and then arrives at the OptiX155/622H on the synchronous Ethernet.
2. Through the synchronous Ethernet interface on the data board that supports the synchronousEthernet technology on the OptiX 155/622H, the clock signal is extracted from the serialcode stream in the Ethernet physical layer line and the clock source is selected.
2 Functions and Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
3. Through the synchronous Ethernet interface, the extracted clock signal is transmitted to theNodeB, BSC, or RNC. In this manner, the transmission of the synchronous Ethernet clocksignal is realized.
4. Inside the OptiX 155/622H, the clock phase-locked loop traces one of the Ethernet lineclocks and generates the system clock.
5. Through the corresponding interface of the data board, the system clock is transmitted tothe downstream boards.
2.5.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Clock SynchronizationThe OptiX 155/622H provides the function of high precision time synchronization, which meetsthe requirement of the equipment for precise time synchronization. The time information isaccessed into the SDH network and is then transmitted to the equipment that requires precisetime, such as NodeB.
The OptiX 155/622H can input and output the time information through the Ethernet interfaceof the data board. In addition, it can also output the time information by multiplexing throughthe SYNC external clock interface and the COM3 and COM4 transparent data ports of the SCBboard. The time information is carried by the line board or data board for synchronizing the timein the entire network.
The following boards of the OptiX 155/622H support the time synchronization function:
l System control board SS49SCBl Line boards OI2S, OI2D, OI4, OI4D, and OI16Dl Ethernet interface board EFS4l Integrated mixed-service processing board CXP
Figure 2-4 shows the networking of the time synchronization application.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-11
Figure 2-4 Networking of the time synchronization application
~
A
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
2.5G link
E
Clock source PRC
B
C
155M link
G
Access layer
Convergence layer
F
622M link
10G ring
DIntermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Intermediateequipment of timesynchronization
Slave equipmentof time
synchronization
Slave equipmentof time
synchronization
Slave equipmentof time
synchronization
~Clock source PRC
Clock information+ Time information
OptiX 155/622H
OptiX OS equipment
Clock information
~GPS
Clock information+ Time information
~GPS
2.6 License ControlLicenses include version licenses and feature licenses.
LicenseThe product of this version is released with a license. That is, customers can obtain correspondingrights committed by the supplier based on the license certificate.
After you purchase the license, you need to load or update the license file.
l At the deployment phase: You can configure or use the new features of this version onlyafter the license file of this version is loaded.
l At the maintenance phase: You can query the license status and use period on the NMS;you need to apply for a new license after the SCC boards are replaced; the services withthe features controlled can be queried and deleted but cannot be added, modified, or enabled
2 Functions and Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
after the licence expires; you need to purchase a new license if the features that you purchaseare increased.
Feature LicenseIn the case of the version, a license file needs to be purchased to enable the time synchronizationfeature of IEEE 1588v2.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Functions and Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-13
3 Product Architecture
About This Chapter
This topic describes the hardware structure and software architecture of the OptiX 155/622H.
3.1 Hardware StructureThis topic describes the equipment structure, slot allocation, boards, and power converter system.
3.2 SDH UnitThe OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of SDH interface boards: STM-1 opticalinterface board, STM-4 optical interface board, STM-16 optical interface board, and STM-1electrical interface board. The SDH interface board receives and transmits STM-1 opticalsignals, STM-4 optical signals, STM-16 optical signals and STM-1 electrical signals, processessection overheads and higher order path overheads, and interprets pointers as defined in ITU-TG.783. In addition, the SDH interface board provides synchronous clock sources for the clockunit.
3.3 PDH UnitThe OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of PDH interface boards: E1 electricalinterface board, E1/T1 electrical interface board, and E3/T3 electrical interface board. The PDHinterface board receives and transmits PDH service signals, and provides synchronous clocksources for the clock unit.
3.4 Data UnitThe OptiX 155/622H provides various Ethernet interface boards to receive and transmit FE andGE service signals.
3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board SCBThe SCB board integrates the functions of the line, tributary, cross-connect, clock, time, SCC,and orderwire modules.
3.6 Integrated Mixed-Service Processing Board CXP(Packet Mode)The CXP board mainly provides the packet data transmission function, and can access the FEand GE services when working with the SCB board.
3.7 Environment Monitoring Unit EMUThe EMU board monitors the environment.
3.8 Power Converter System UPM
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
The uninterruptible power module (UPM) is a 220 V AC to -48 V DC power converter systemthat is used only by the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM consists of the double-channel hot backupAC/DC converter module, monitoring module, and storage battery.
3.9 Software Architecture
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
3.1 Hardware StructureThis topic describes the equipment structure, slot allocation, boards, and power converter system.
3.1.1 ChassisThis topic describes the appearance of the equipment and provides the dimensions and weightof the equipment.
3.1.2 Slot Allocation and InterfacesSeven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H for installing boards.
3.1.3 Board TypeWith the cross-connect unit working as the core unit, the OptiX 155/622H consists of the SDHinterface unit, PDH interface unit, Ethernet interface unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, SCCunit, and orderwire unit.
3.1.1 ChassisThis topic describes the appearance of the equipment and provides the dimensions and weightof the equipment.
The OptiX 155/622H adopts a case-shaped structure with the dimensions of 436 mm (W) x 293mm (D) x 86 mm (H). The OptiX 155/622H is designed in compliance with the standards of the19-inch cabinet. In the maximum configuration, the weight of the OptiX 155/622H is not morethan 10 kg, and the maximum power consumption is not more than 100 W. The OptiX 155/622Hconsists of a chassis, fan board, power filter board, air filter, and the boards installed in the boardarea. See Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Equipment structure of the OptiX 155/622H
Assembly
Fanboard
Boardarea
Power filter board andair filter
l Fan board: It is used for the heat dissipation of the equipment.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
l Air filter and power filter board: The air filter together with the fan board is used for theventilation and heat dissipation of the equipment. The power filter board inputs power forthe equipment.
l Board area: It houses service boards and system control board, and provides various serviceinterfaces and monitoring and management interfaces.
NOTE
If the power consumption of the hardware configuration exceeds 100 W, the system may become unstable.
3.1.2 Slot Allocation and InterfacesSeven physical slots are available on the OptiX 155/622H for installing boards.
Figure 3-2 shows the slot layout of the OptiX 155/622H and Table 3-1 lists the available boards.
Figure 3-2 Slot layout of the OptiX 155/622H
FAN P
OI
SCB slot
IU4
IU3 IU2 IU1
Table 3-1 SDH processing boards
Board Name Full Name Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
OI2S 1xSTM-1optical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
Ie-1, S-1.1,L-1.1 and L-1.2
SC/LC
OI2D 2xSTM-1optical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, IU3,IU5a
Ie-1, S-1.1,L-1.1, L-1.2
SC/LC
SL1O 8xSTM-1optical interfaceboard
IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1,L-1.1, L-1.2
SC/LC
SL1Q 4xSTM-1optical interfaceboard
IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1,L-1.1, L-1.2
SC/LC
OI4 1xSTM-4optical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
Ie-4, S-4.1,L-4.1, L-4.2
SC/LC
OI4D 2xSTM-4optical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, IU3,IU5a
Ie-4, S-4.1,L-4.1, L-4.2
SC/LC
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Board Name Full Name Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
OI16D 2xSTM-16optical interfaceboard
IU5a S-16.1 LC
SB2L 1xSTM-1single-fiberbidirectionaloptical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
S-1.1, L-1.1 SC (Only theleft opticalinterface isavailable.)
SB2R 1xSTM-1single-fiberbidirectionaloptical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
S-1.1, L-1.1 SC (Only theright opticalinterface isavailable.)
SB2D 2xSTM-1single-fiberbidirectionaloptical interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
S-1.1, L-1.1 SC
SLE 1xSTM-1electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm STM-1interface
75-ohm SMBco-axialinterface
SDE 2xSTM-1electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm STM-1interface
75-ohm SMBco-axialinterface
a: IU5 and IU6 are logical slots that are integrated on the SCB board.
Table 3-2 PDH boards
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
SP1S 4xE1 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75/120-ohm E1interface
2 mmHMconnector
SP1D 8xE1 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75/120-ohm E1interface
2 mmHMconnector
SP2D 16xE1 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, IU3,IU6a
75/120-ohm E1interface
2 mmHMconnector
PD2S 16xE1 electricalinterface board
IU4 75/120-ohm E1interface
2 mmHMconnector
PD2D 32xE1 electricalinterface board
IU4 75/120-ohm E1interface
2 mmHMconnector
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
PD2T 48xE1 electricalinterface board
IU4 75/120-ohm E1interface
2 mmHMconnector
SM1S 4xE1/T1electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75/120-ohm E1interface or 100-ohm T1interface
2 mmHMconnector
SM1D 8xE1/T1electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75/120-ohm E1interface or 100-ohm T1interface
2 mmHMconnector
PM2S 16xE1/T1electricalinterface board
IU4 75/120-ohm E1interface or 100-ohm T1interface
2 mmHMconnector
PM2D 32xE1/T1electricalinterface board
IU4 75/120-ohm E1interface or 100-ohm T1interface
2 mmHMconnector
PM2T 48xE1/T1electricalinterface board
IU4 75/120-ohm E1interface or 100-ohm T1interface
2 mmHMconnector
PE3S 1xE3 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm E3interface
SMB co-axialconnector
PE3D 2xE3 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm E3interface
SMB co-axialconnector
PE3T 3xE3 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm E3interface
SMB co-axialconnector
PT3S 1xT3 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm T3interface
SMB co-axialconnector
PT3D 2xT3 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm T3interface
SMB co-axialconnector
PT3T 3xT3 electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
75-ohm T3interface
SMB co-axialconnector
a: IU5 and IU6 are logical slots that are integrated on the SCB board.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 3-3 Data boards
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
ET1 8xEthernetservice interfaceboard
IU4 10/100BASE-T RJ-45
ET1O 8xEthernetserviceelectricalinterface board
IU4 10/100BASE-T RJ-45
ET1D 2xEthernetserviceelectricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
10/100BASE-T RJ-45
EF1 6xEthernetservice interfaceboard
IU4 10/100Base-T,100Base-FX
RJ-45
EFS 4xEthernetservice interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
10/100BASE-T RJ-45
EFS4 4xEthernetservice interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
100BASE-T RJ-45
EGS 1xGE opticalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
1000BASE-LX/SX
LC
EFSC 12xEthernetservice interfaceboard
IU4 10/100BASE-T RJ-45
EFT 4xEthernetservice interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
10/100BASE-T RJ-45
ELT2 2xFE opticalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
S-1.1, Ie-1 LC
EGT 1xGE Ethernettransparenttransmissionboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
1000BASE-LX/SX
LC
AIUD 2xATM opticalinterface board
IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1,L-1.1, L-1.2
Single-modeLC, multi-modeMT-RJ
AIUQ 4xATM opticalinterface board
IU4 Ie-1, S-1.1,L-1.1, L-1.2
Single-modeLC, multi-modeMT-RJ
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
SHLQ Single-line-pairhigh-bit-ratedigitalsubscriber lineinterface
IU1, IU2, andIU3
RJ-11connector, two-wire twisted pair
N64 Nx64 kbit/sinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
Nx64 kbit/sinterfaces: V.35, V.24, X.21,RS-449,EIA-530Framed E1interfaces:CRC4, non-CRC4
2 mmHM
N64Q 4-channel Nx64kbit/s interfaceboard
IU1, IU2, andIU3
Nx64 kbit/sinterfaces: V.35, X.21,RS-449, V.24,RS-530,RS-530A
2 mmHM
FP2D 16xFramed E1electricalinterface board
IU1, IU2, andIU3
Framed E1interfaces:CRC4, non-CRC4
DB78
TDA Multi-channeltone & dataaccess board
IU4 12-channelaudio+4-channel RS-232+4-channelRS-422
2 mmHMconnector
Table 3-4 Packet boards
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
CXP Integratedmixed-serviceprocessingboard
IU4 100Base-TX,1000Base-SX/LX/VX/ZX
RJ-45, LC
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 3-5 Cross-connect and system control boards
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
SCB System controlboard
SCB S-1.1, S-4.1,L-4.1, L-4.2,S-16.1, 75/120-ohm E1interfaces
SC, LC, 2mmHM
Table 3-6 Auxiliary boards
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
EMU Power andenvironmentmonitoring unit
IU3 2-channelvoltagemonitoring,temperaturemonitoring,12/6-channelalarm inputs/outputs, 1-channelRS-232/RS-422serialcommunicationinterface
-
FAN Fan board FAN - -
Table 3-7 Power supply boards
Board Name Full Spelling Valid Slot InterfaceType
Connector
POI/POU Filtering board POI/POU H2X2(4.20) H2(5.08)
UPM(CAU) Powermonitoring unit
Externalcomponent
- -
3.1.3 Board TypeWith the cross-connect unit working as the core unit, the OptiX 155/622H consists of the SDHinterface unit, PDH interface unit, Ethernet interface unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, SCCunit, and orderwire unit.
Figure 3-3 shows the system architecture of the OptiX 155/622H.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
Figure 3-3 System architecture of the OptiX 155/622H
IU1
Clockunit
External clockinterface
NMinterface
Orderwirephone
Cross-connectunit
STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1,E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet
SCCunit
Orderwireunit
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1,E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet
STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1,E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
E1
STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1,E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet
STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1,E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet
STM-1/STM-4, E1/T1,E3/T3, DDN, Ethernet
STM-1, E1, E1/T1,ATM, Ethernet
E1
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
STM-1, E1, E1/T1, ATM,Ethernet
NOTE
The boards that need to be inserted in slots IU5 and IU6 are integrated on the SCB board.
Table 3-8 Boards and functions of each unit
Unit Board Function
SDH interface unit OI16D, OI2S, OI2D, SL1O,SL1Q, OI4, OI4D, SB2L,SB2R, SB2D, SLE, and SDE
l Accesses and processesSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16optical signals.
l Accesses and processesSTM-1 electrical signals.
PDH interface unit SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S,PD2D, PD2T, SM1S, SM1D,PM2S, PM2D, PM2T, PE3S,PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D,and PT3T
Accesses and processes E1,E1/T1, E3, and T3 PDHelectrical signals.
Ethernet service processingunit
ET1, ET1O, ET1D, EF1,EFS, EFS4, EFSC, EGS,EFT, ELT2, EGT, CXP
Accesses and processes10/100BASE-T(X),100BASE-FX, and1000BASE-LX/SX/VX/ZXEthernet signals.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Unit Board Function
Data service processing unit SHLQ, N64, N64Q, FP2D,TDA
l Accesses and processesNx64 kbit/s (N is 1-32)signals, Framed E1signals, and Unframed E1signals.
l Implements the cross-connection for the Nx64kbit/s signals on thesystem side.
l Accesses and processesNx2.4 kbit/s (N = 1-18)services.
ATM service processing unit AIUD and AIUQ Accesses and processesATM signals.
System control andcommunication unit
SCB l Provides the interface forconnecting the equipmentto the NM.
l Processes the overheadsof SDH signals.
l Processes orderwiresignals.
l Processes clock signals.l Implements the cross-
connection.l Processes broadcast data
services.l Processes E1 signals and
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16optical signals.
Environment monitoring unit EMU Monitors the operatingvoltage and operatingtemperature of theequipment, supports theinput and output ofhousekeeping signals, andsupports serialcommunication.
Power input unit POI/POU Provides the power supply.
3.2 SDH UnitThe OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of SDH interface boards: STM-1 opticalinterface board, STM-4 optical interface board, STM-16 optical interface board, and STM-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
electrical interface board. The SDH interface board receives and transmits STM-1 opticalsignals, STM-4 optical signals, STM-16 optical signals and STM-1 electrical signals, processessection overheads and higher order path overheads, and interprets pointers as defined in ITU-TG.783. In addition, the SDH interface board provides synchronous clock sources for the clockunit.
The OptiX 155/622H provides the following SDH interface boards.
3.2.1 STM-16 Optical Interface Board OI16DThe OI16D board accesses STM-16 optical signals and is currently integrated on SCB.
3.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interface Board OI4/OI4DThe OI4 and OI4D boards access STM-4 optical signals.
3.2.3 STM-1 Optical Interface Board OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1OThe OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards access STM-1 signals.
3.2.4 Single-Fiber STM-1 Interface Board SB2D/SB2L/SB2RThe SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards access single-fiber STM-1 optical signals.
3.2.5 STM-1 Electrical Interface Board SDE/SLEThe SDE and SLE boards access STM-1 electrical signals.
3.2.1 STM-16 Optical Interface Board OI16DThe OI16D board accesses STM-16 optical signals and is currently integrated on SCB.
Functionsl Accesses STM-16 optical signals.l Provides the S-16.1 optical interface.l Provides two synchronous clock sources for the clock unit.l Supports the SNCP and MSP.l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.l Provides data communication channel (DCC) and orderwire communication.l Supports inloop and outloop.l The optical interface on the OI16D board supports the LC connector. Using the LC
connector can facilitate the maintenance for optical modules.
Application
When the OptiX 155/622H uses the OI16D board, the equipment can implement the followingfunctions:
l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-16 rate.l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-16 rate with other Huawei equipment, such as
the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+.l Provides STM-16 optical interfaces for interconnection with third-party equipment.
3.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interface Board OI4/OI4DThe OI4 and OI4D boards access STM-4 optical signals.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Functionsl Accesses STM-4 optical signals.
l Provides optical interfaces: Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2.
l OI4D provides two synchronous clock sources for the clock unit and OI4 provides one.
l Supports MSP and SNCP.
l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
l Provides data communication channels (DCCs) and orderwire communication.
l Supports inloop and outloop.
l The optical interface on the OI4/OI4D board supports the SC connector and LC connector.Select the proper connector type according to different requirements. Using the LCconnector can facilitate the maintenance of optical modules.
Application
When the OptiX 155/622H uses the OI4 board or the OI4D board, the equipment can implementthe following functions:
l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-4 rate.
l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-4 rate with other Huawei equipment, such asthe OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+.
l Provides STM-4 optical interfaces for interconnection with third-party equipment.
3.2.3 STM-1 Optical Interface Board OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1OThe OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards access STM-1 signals.
Functionsl Accesses STM-1 optical signals.
l Provides four types of optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2.
l The OI2S and OI2D boards can provide the synchronous clock source for the clock unit.
l Supports MSP and SNCP.
l Supports the ALS function.
l Provides DCCs communication.
l The OI2S/OI2D/SL1O boards provides orderwire communication.
l Supports inloop and outloop.
l The OI2S and OI2D boards supports the pluggable optical module.
Table 3-9 lists the functions of the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards.
Table 3-9 Functions of the OI2S, OI2D, SL1Q and SL1O boards
Item OI2S OI2D SL1Q SL1O
Number ofinterfaces
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1 4xSTM-1 8xSTM-1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
Item OI2S OI2D SL1Q SL1O
Opticalinterfacetype
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2
Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU5a IU4 IU4
Type ofconnector
SC/LC SC/LC SC SC
Number ofsynchronousclock sources
1 2 - -
DCCcommunication
D1-D3 and D4-D12 D1-D3 and D4-D12 D1-D3 D1-D3
a: The IU5 is a logical slot that is integrated on the SCB board.
ApplicationWhen the OptiX 155/622H uses the STM-1 optical interface board, the equipment can implementthe following functions:
l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-1 rate.l Forms rings or chains operating at the STM-1 rate with other Huawei equipment, such as
the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+.l Provides STM-1 interfaces for interconnection with third-party equipment.l The SL1Q and SL1O boards do not support MSP but support SNCP. The SL1Q and SL1O
boards are mainly connected to the low-level transmission equipment, such as the OptiXMetro 500 and the OptiX Metro 100.
3.2.4 Single-Fiber STM-1 Interface Board SB2D/SB2L/SB2RThe SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards access single-fiber STM-1 optical signals.
Functionsl Accesses STM-1 optical signals.l Provides two types of optical interfaces: S-1.1 and L-1.1.l Provides the single-fiber transceiver optical interface to receive and transmit optical signals
at the same time by carrying the signals on two different wavelengths on one fiber.l Supports ALS.l Detects and reports the alarms and performance events on the line.l Supports inloop and outloop.l Supports linear MSP and unidirectional MSP.
Table 3-10 lists the functions of the SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 3-10 Functions of the SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards
Item SB2D SB2L SB2R
Number ofinterfaces
2xSTM-1 1xSTM-1 1xSTM-1
Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3
Type ofconnector
SC SC SC
Transmit(Tx) andreceive (Rx)wavelengths
Left optical interface: 1550nm (Tx)/1310 nm (Rx)Right optical interface: 1310nm (Tx)/1550 nm (Rx)
Only the left opticalinterface isavailable: 1550 nm(Tx)/1310 nm (Rx)
Only the right opticalinterface is available:1310 nm (Tx)/1550nm (Rx)
ApplicationThe SB2D, SB2L, and SB2R boards are applied to the network in the same way as the OI2S,OI2D, SL1Q, and SL1O boards. In the application, pay attention to the following points:
l In the case of the SB2D board, the transmit wavelength and receive wavelength of the leftoptical interface are 1550 nm and 1310 nm respectively, and the transmit wavelength andreceive wavelength of the right interface are 1310 nm and 1550 nm respectively.
l In the case of the SB2L board, only the left optical interface is available. The transmitwavelength and receive wavelength are 1550 nm and 1310 nm respectively.
l In the case of the SB2R board, only the right optical interface is available. The transmitwavelength and receive wavelength are 1310 nm and 1550 nm respectively.
l When you use the single-fiber interface boards in networking, make sure that thewavelength of the receive interface and the wavelength of the transmit interface arematched. For example, a transmit interface operating at a wavelength of 1550 nmcorresponds to a receive interface operating at a wavelength of 1550 nm, and a transmitinterface operating at a wavelength of 1310 nm corresponds to a receive interface with awavelength of 1310 nm.
l When you use the SB2R and SB2L boards in networking, make sure that the SB2R andSB2L boards are used at adjacent sites, as shown in Figure 3-4.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
Figure 3-4 Application of the SB2R and SB2L boards
SB2L SB2R
SB2R
SB2RSB2L
SB2L SB2RSB2L
3.2.5 STM-1 Electrical Interface Board SDE/SLEThe SDE and SLE boards access STM-1 electrical signals.
Functionsl Accesses STM-1 electrical signals.l Detects and reports the alarms and performance events on the line.l Supports inloop and outloop on the line.l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit.
Table 3-11 lists the functions of the SDE and SLE boards.
Table 3-11 Functions of the SDE and SLE boards
Comparison SLE SDE
Number ofinterfaces
1xSTM-1 2xSTM-1
Valid slot IU1, IU2, and IU3 IU1, IU2, and IU3
Type of connector SMB SMB
Number ofsynchronousclock sources
1 2
ApplicationWhen the OptiX 155/622H uses the SDE board or the SLE board, the equipment can implementthe following functions:
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
l Receives and transmits STM-1 electrical signals when the OptiX 155/622H is connectedto other Huawei equipment, such as the OptiX 155/622 and the OptiX 2500+.
l Interconnects with other equipment that provides STM-1 electrical interfaces, such as themicrowave equipment, ATM electrical interface equipment, and other equipment withSTM-1 electrical interfaces.
3.3 PDH UnitThe OptiX 155/622H provides the following types of PDH interface boards: E1 electricalinterface board, E1/T1 electrical interface board, and E3/T3 electrical interface board. The PDHinterface board receives and transmits PDH service signals, and provides synchronous clocksources for the clock unit.
The OptiX 155/622H provides the following PDH electrical interface boards.
3.3.1 E1 Electrical Interface Boards SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2TThe SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, and PD2T boards access E1 services.
3.3.2 E1/T1 Compliant Electrical Interface Board SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2TThe SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards access E1/T1 services.
3.3.3 E3/T3 Electrical Interface Board PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3TThe PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards access E3/T3 services.
3.3.1 E1 Electrical Interface Boards SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
The SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, and PD2T boards access E1 services.
Functionsl Accesses E1 services.l Supports asynchronous mapping of E1 signals to VC-12s, as defined in ITU-T G.703.l Provides the 75-ohm unbalanced and 120-ohm balanced interfaces, whose characteristics
comply with related specifications defined in ITU-T G.703.l Processes VC-12 path overheads, configures each service channel, monitors alarms and
performance of each service channel, and communicates with the SCC unit.l Supports inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1 signals or to locate the fault, thus
facilitating the maintenance.l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit.l The SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T boards support the settings of 75/120-ohm impedance at the
tributary port.
Table 3-12 lists the functions of the SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D, and PD2T boards.
Table 3-12 Functions of the SP1S, SP1D, SP2D, PD2S, PD2D and PD2T boards
Item SP1S SP1D SP2D PD2S PD2D PD2T
Number ofinterfaces
4xE1 8xE1 16xE1 16xE1 32xE1 48xE1
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
Item SP1S SP1D SP2D PD2S PD2D PD2T
Type ofconnector
2 mm HM connector
Valid slot IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,IU3, andIU6a
IU4 IU4 IU4
Number ofsynchronous clocksources
1 2 2 2 4 6
a: The IU6 is a logical slot that is integrated on the SCB board.
Application
The SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T board supports the following application:
l Connected to the E1 trunk cable of a switch for application in the local telephone network.
l Connected to the optical line terminal (OLT) and optical network unit (ONU) in the accessnetwork. In this way, the OptiX 155/622H can be applied in the access network.
l Interconnected with the communication equipment that provides standard E1 interfaces,such as mobile base stations, wireless access base stations, node machines in the digitaldata network (DDN), and routers of the Internet service provider (ISP) and LAN.
3.3.2 E1/T1 Compliant Electrical Interface Board SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
The SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards access E1/T1 services.
Functionsl Accesses E1/T1 services.
l Supports asynchronous mapping of E1/T1 signals to VC-12s as defined in ITU-T G.703and multiplexing of TU-12s into TUG-2s.
l Provides the 100-ohm balanced interface for T1 signals and the 75-ohm unbalanced and120-ohm balanced interfaces for E1 signals, whose characteristics comply with relatedspecifications defined in ITU-T G.703.
l Selects E1/T1 signals through software.
l Processes the VC-12 path overheads, configures each service channel, monitors alarms andperformance of each service channel, and communicates with the SCC unit.
l Supports inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1/T1 services or to locate the fault, thusfacilitating the maintenance.
l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit.
Table 3-13 lists the functions of the SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 3-13 Functions of the SM1S, SM1D, PM2S, PM2D, and PM2T boards
Item SM1S SM1D PM2S PM2D PM2T
Number ofinterfaces
4xE1/T1 8xE1/T1 16xE1/T1 32xE1/T1 48xE1/T1
Type ofconnector
2 mm HM connector
Valid slot IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU4 IU4 IU4
Number ofsynchronousclock sources
1 2 2 4 6
ApplicationThe SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T board supports the following application:
l Connected to the OLT and ONU in the access network. In this way, the OptiX 155/622Hcan be applied in the access network.
l Interconnected with the communication equipment that provides standard E1 or T1interfaces, such as mobile base stations, wireless access base stations, node machines inthe DDN, and routers of the ISP and LAN.
3.3.3 E3/T3 Electrical Interface Board PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
The PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards access E3/T3 services.
Functionsl Accesses E3/T3 service signals.l Supports asynchronous mapping of E3/T3 signals to VC-3s as defined in ITU-T G.703 and
multiplexing of TU-3s into TUG-3s.l Provides the 75-ohm unbalanced E3 interface and 100-ohm/120-ohm balanced T3 interface
that comply with ITU-T G.703.l Encodes/Decodes E3/T3 signals to implement the transmitting/receiving of high
performance E3 or T3 signals.l Maps E3/T3 PDH signals into VC-4s and demaps E3/T3 PDH signals from VC-4s.l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit.
Table 3-14 lists the functions of the PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
Table 3-14 Functions of the PE3S, PE3D, PE3T, PT3S, PT3D, and PT3T boards
Item PE3S PE3D PE3T PT3S PT3D PT3T
Number ofinterfaces
1xE3 2xE3 3xE3 1xT3 2xT3 3xT3
Type ofconnector
SMB
Valid slot IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
Interfaceimpedance
75 ohms 75 ohms 75 ohms 100/120ohms
100/120ohms
100/120ohms
Number ofsynchronous clocksources
1 2 2 1 2 2
Application
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T board is interconnected with the communicationequipment that provides standard E3 or T3 interfaces.
3.4 Data UnitThe OptiX 155/622H provides various Ethernet interface boards to receive and transmit FE andGE service signals.
According to the encapsulation protocol and mapping granularity, the Ethernet interface boardsare classified into the following types.
3.4.1 Ethernet Interface Boards ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol)The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support the multi-link point to point protocol (ML-PPP) only. The mapping granularity is VC-12. These boards transmit Ethernet services.
3.4.2 Ethernet Transparent Transmission Boards EFT/ELT2/EGT Boards (Supporting the GFPProtocol)The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards support the generic framing procedure (GFP). The mappinggranularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards transmit Ethernet services.
3.4.3 Ethernet Switching Boards EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol)The EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards support the Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)encapsulation protocol. The mapping granularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards aremainly used to transmit Ethernet services.
3.4.4 ATM Interface Board AIUD/AIUQThe AIUD and AIUQ boards transmit ATM services and provide protection for ATM services.
3.4.5 Nx64kbit/s Interface Board N64/N64Q/FP2DThe N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards convert Nx64 kbit/s signals and Framed E1 signals into E1signals.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
3.4.6 Single Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line Interface Board SHLQThe SHLQ board transmits E1 signals and Nx64 kbit/s signals over a long distance.
3.4.7 Tone and Data Access Board TDAThe TDA board receives and transmits audio signals and environment monitoring signals.
3.4.1 Ethernet Interface Boards ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supportingthe ML-PPP Protocol)
The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support the multi-link point to point protocol (ML-PPP) only. The mapping granularity is VC-12. These boards transmit Ethernet services.
Functionsl Provides 10M/100M Ethernet electrical interfaces and 100M optical interfaces, whose
electrical characteristics, such as the flow control function, comply with IEEE 802.3x.l Supports the working modes of auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex/half-duplex and 10M
full-duplex/half-duplex.l Supports the ML-PPP encapsulation protocol with the encapsulation granularity of VC-12.l Provides bandwidth sharing and statistical multiplexing based on virtual local area network
(VLAN) and port to improve the bandwidth utilization.l Supports Ethernet layer 2 switching.l Supports isolation among different users, and VLAN isolation within one user.l The ET1 and ET1D boards support Ethernet private line (EPL) services. The ET1O, ET1D,
and EF1 boards support Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services.l Supports multicast and broadcast.l Supports the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) to prevent broadcast storms.
Table 3-15 lists the functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards.
Table 3-15 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards
Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1
Number of FEelectrical interfaces
8 8 2 4
Number of FE opticalinterfaces
- - - 2
Type of connector RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Electricalinterface:RJ-45Opticalinterface: LC
Valid slot IU4 IU4 IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU4
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-21
Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1
Workingmode
Electricalinterface
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Opticalinterface
- - - 100M full-duplex
Encapsulationprotocol
ML-PPP
VC-4 bandwidth onthe SDH side
1 1 1 1
Bound bandwidth 48xE1 48xE1 16xE1 48xE1
Number ofVCTRUNKs
16 16 16 16
Layer 2 switching - Supported Supported Supported
VLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported
EVPL Supported - Supported -
EPL Supported - Supported -
EPLAN - Supported Supported Supported
EVPLAN - - - -
Spanning tree - Supported Supported Supported
RMON Supported Supported Supported Supported
IGMP Snooping - Supported Supported Supported
Application
The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards are interconnected with PCs, routers or Ethernetswitches to transmit Ethernet services. Pay attention to the following points:
l The ET1 and ET1D boards support transparent transmission of services and are applicableto EPL services.
l The ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards support layer 2 switching of services and are applicableto EPLAN services.
l The EF1 board provides 100M optical interfaces and can be interconnected with the dataequipment that provides 100M optical interfaces.
l The ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards use the same encapsulation protocol and mappinggranularity. Hence, they can be interconnected with each other.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
3.4.2 Ethernet Transparent Transmission Boards EFT/ELT2/EGTBoards (Supporting the GFP Protocol)
The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards support the generic framing procedure (GFP). The mappinggranularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards transmit Ethernet services.
Functionsl Provides 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet interfaces, the electrical characteristics of which
comply with IEEE 802.3x.l Maps Ethernet services into VC-12s or VC-3s.l The EGT, EFT, and ELT2 boards support the GFP, link access procedure-SDH (LAPS),
and high level data link control (HDLC).l Receives and transmits test frames.l Supports inloop and outloop for fast fault locating and troubleshooting.l Counts test frames, reports the result, and generates alarms upon errors.
Table 3-16 lists the functions of the EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards.
Table 3-16 Functions of the EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards
Board Feature EFT ELT2 EGT
Number of FE electricalinterfaces
4 - -
Number of FE opticalinterfaces
- 2 -
Number of GE opticalinterfaces
- - 1
Type of connector RJ-45 LC LC
Valid slot IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU1, IU2, and IU3
Workingmode
FE electricalinterface
Auto-negotiation,10M/100M full-duplex
- -
FE opticalinterface
- 100M full-duplex
-
GE opticalinterface
- - Auto-negotiation,1000M full-duplex
VC-4 bandwidth on the SDHside
2 2 2
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-23
Board Feature EFT ELT2 EGT
Bound bandwidth 6xVC-3 or63xVC-12 +3xVC-3
6xVC-3 or63xVC-12 +3xVC-3
6xVC-3 or63xVC-12
Number of VCTRUNKs 4 2 1
Layer 2 switching - - -
VLAN - - -
EVPL - - -
EPL Supported Supported Supported
EPLAN - - -
EVPLAN - - -
Spanning tree - - -
GFP Supported Supported Supported
LAPS Supported Supported Supported
HDLC Supported Supported Supported
Link state pass through (LPT) Supported Supported Supported
Test frame Supported Supported Supported
CAR - - -
CoS - - -
Intra-board link aggregationgroup (LAG)
- - -
Port mirroring - - -
IGMP snooping - - -
LCAS V2 Supported Supported Supported
Ethernet OAM - - -
RMON Supported Supported Supported
QinQ - - -
Application
The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards can be interconnected with PCs, routers, or Ethernet switchesto transmit Ethernet services. Pay attention to the following points:
l The EGT board provides 1000M optical interfaces and can be interconnected with the dataequipment that provides 1000M optical interfaces.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
l The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards only support the transparent transmission of services andare applicable to EPL services.
l The ELT2 board provides 100M optical interfaces and can be interconnected with the dataequipment that provides 100M optical interfaces.
l The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards use the same encapsulation protocol and mappinggranularity, and they can be interconnected with each other.
l The EFT, ELT2, and EGT boards support the LCAS V2.
3.4.3 Ethernet Switching Boards EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supportingthe GFP Protocol)
The EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards support the Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)encapsulation protocol. The mapping granularities are VC-12 and VC-3. These boards aremainly used to transmit Ethernet services.
Functionsl Provides 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet interfaces, whose electrical characteristics comply
with IEEE 802.3x.l Maps Ethernet services into VC-12s or VC-3s.l The EFS, EGS, and EFSC boards support the GFP encapsulation protocol. The EFS4 board
supports the GFP, Link Access Procedure-SDH (LAPS), and High Level Data Link Control(HDLC) encapsulation protocols.
l Receives and transmits test frames.l Supports inloop and outloop for fast fault location and troubleshooting.l Counts test frames, reports the result, and generates alarms.l The EFS, EFS4, EFSC, and EGS boards support the OAM function.l The EFS, EFSC, EGS, and EFS4 boards support the auto-sensing of the network cable.l The EFS4 board supports the high precise time synchronization technology, which
complies with IEEE 1588 V2.
Table 3-17 lists the functions of the EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards.
Table 3-17 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EGS, and EFSC boards
Board Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4
Number of FEelectricalinterfaces
4 12 - 4
Number of FEoptical interfaces
- - - -
Number of GEoptical interfaces
- - 1 -
Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45
Valid slot IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU4 IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-25
Board Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4
Workingmode
FEelectricalinterface
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Auto-negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex,10M/100M half-duplex
- Auto-negotiation, 100Mfull-duplex
FEopticalinterface
- - - -
GEopticalinterface
- - 1000Mfull-duplex
-
VC-4 bandwidthon the SDH side
4 4 4 4
Bound bandwidth 12xVC-3 or126xVC-12+6xVC-3
12xVC-3or126xVC-12+6xVC-3
12xVC-3or126xVC-12+6xVC-3
12xVC-3or63xVC-12+9xVC-3
Number ofVCTRUNKs
24 24 24 8
Layer 2 switching Supported Supported Supported
Supported
VLAN Supported Supported Supported
Supported
EVPL Supported Supported Supported
Supported
EPL Supported Supported Supported
Supported
EPLAN Supported Supported Supported
Supported
EVPLAN Supported Supported Supported
Supported
STP Supported Supported Supported
Supported
GFP Supported Supported Supported
Supported
LAPS - - - Supported
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Board Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4
HDLC - - - Supported
Link state passthrough (LPT)
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Test frame Supported Supported Supported
Supported
CAR Supported Supported Supported
Supported
CoS Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Intra-board linkaggregationgroup (LAG)
- - - Supported
Port mirroring - - - Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported Supported Supported
Supported
LCAS V2protocol
Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported Supported Supported
Supported
RMON Supported Supported Supported
Supported
QinQ - - - Supported
Application
The EFS, EFS4, EGS, EFSC boards interconnect with PCs, routers, or Ethernet switches totransmit Ethernet services. Note the following points:
l The EFS, EFS4, EGS, EFSC boards support Layer 2 switching and multi-protocol labelswitching (MPLS) to carry EPL, Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), EPLAN, andEthernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services.
l The EGS board provides 1000M optical interfaces to interconnect with data equipment thathas 1000M optical interfaces.
l The EFS, EFS4, EGS, EFSC boards use the same encapsulation protocol and mappinggranularity, and thus they can interconnect with each other.
l The EFS, EFS4, EFSC, and EGS boards support the LCAS V2 protocol.
3.4.4 ATM Interface Board AIUD/AIUQThe AIUD and AIUQ boards transmit ATM services and provide protection for ATM services.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-27
FunctionsThe AIUD board supports two external ports and two internal ports. The AIUQ board supportsfour external ports and four internal ports. The AIUD and AIUQ boards can be installed in slotIU4 of the OptiX 155/622H.
l Supports the configuration of multicast and point-to-point ATM services (including spatialmulticast services and logical multicast services).
l Provides VP/VC connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection for ATM services. Eight protectionconfiguration modes are available.
l Supports flow control for ATM services. Fifteen flow control modes are supportedaccording to ITU-T Recommendations.
l Supports the ATM OAM function and continuity check (CC) by sending the loopback (LB)cell and CC cell, and captures the alarm indication signal (AIS) and the remote defectindication (RDI) signal.
l Supports the setting of the ATM port attributes. The ATM ports can be set according to theservice requirements. Setting and querying the VP/VC sub-space are supported.
l Monitors ATM service alarms. All the alarms related to ATM features can be reported.l Supports the performance measurement of ATM services. All the performance events
related to ATM features can be counted.l Supports the SDH features of ATM services.
ApplicationThe AIUD and AIUQ boards mainly transmit and protect ATM services. The AIUD and AIUQboards support the following services:l Constant bit rate (CBR) servicesl Real time variable bit rate (rt-VBR) servicesl Non-real time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR) servicesl Unspecified bit rate (UBR) servicesThe AIUD and AIUQ boards do not support available bit rate (VBR) services. The CBR servicesare applied to voice services, video services, and circuit emulation services at a constant bit rate.These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. The rt-VBR services areapplied to audio and video services at a variable bit rate. The nrt-VBR services are applied todata transmission. The UBR services are applied to LAN emulation and file transfer.
The services and traffic types supported by the OptiX 155/622H comply with IETF RFC2514,ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1. For details, see Table 3-18.
Table 3-18 ATM service types and traffic types
No. Traffic Type ServiceType
Parameter
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR -
2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
No. Traffic Type ServiceType
Parameter
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
3.4.5 Nx64kbit/s Interface Board N64/N64Q/FP2DThe N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards convert Nx64 kbit/s signals and Framed E1 signals into E1signals.
Functions
Table 3-19 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards
BoardFeature
N64 N64Q FP2D
Processingcapability
Performs timeslot cross-connection for two NMor two monitoringsignals (at Nx64 kbit/s),and E1 services (2xE1signals from theinterface side or 8xE1signals from the lineside), thus realizing re-integration of E1services and timeslotextraction
Converts 4xNx64kbit/s service signalsinto E1 signals andperforms timeslotcross-connection,thus realizing re-integration of E1services and timeslotextraction
Accesses 16xFramed E1signals and provides timedivision cross-connectservices at the 64 kbit/s level
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-29
BoardFeature
N64 N64Q FP2D
Interfacespecification
Nx64 kbit/s interface:V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530Framed E1 interface:CRC4 and non-CRC4
Nx64 kbit/s interface:V.35/X.21/RS-449/V.24/RS-530/RS-530A
Framed E1 interface: CRC4and non-CRC4
Type ofconnector
2 mm HM 2 mm HM DB78
Protection
Not supported Not supported Supports the PPS protection.
Loopback
Supports inloop andoutloop for all ports
Supports inloop andoutloop for all ports
Supports inloop and outloopfor all ports
Alarmandperformanceevent
Provides abundantalarms and performanceevents, which facilitatesmanagement andmaintenance of theequipment
Provides abundantalarms andperformance events,which facilitatesmanagement andmaintenance of theequipment
Provides abundant alarms andperformance events, whichfacilitates management andmaintenance of the equipment
Application
The N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards are mainly applied to point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, andmultipoint-to-multipoint transmission of the video conference systems and routers, and are usedfor convergence in the case of multi-point router access, and thus access V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 multi-protocol interface services and Framed E1 services to transmissionnetworks.
The FP2D board is applicable to DDN private networks of small and medium-sized enterprises,government departments, banks or security business halls.
3.4.6 Single Pair High-Bit-Rate Digital Subscriber Line InterfaceBoard SHLQ
The SHLQ board transmits E1 signals and Nx64 kbit/s signals over a long distance.
Functionsl Provides four G.SHDSL electrical interfaces to transmit E1/V.35 services over a long
distance on the existing twisted pair network by adopting the single pair high-bit-rate digitalsubscriber line (SHDSL) technology.
l The characteristics of interfaces comply with the corresponding specifications defined inITU-T G.991.2.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
l Transmits Framed E1 and Nx64 kbit/s data services in the G.SHDSL format, and can thusaccess remote E1 and Nx64 kbit/s signals.
l Processes the path overheads, configures each G.SHDSL service channel, and monitors thealarms and performance of each G.SHDSL service channel. In addition, this boardimplements the communication between the G.SHDSL service channels and the SCC unit.
l Supports inloop and outloop so that faults can be located quickly.l Uses the RJ-11 connector.l Provides one synchronous clock source for the clock unit.
Applicationl This board accesses G.SHDSL services to the transmission equipment.l This board extends the transmission distance of E1 signals to more than 3 km, or the
transmission distance of 3x64 kbit/s signals to more than 6.5 km.
3.4.7 Tone and Data Access Board TDAThe TDA board receives and transmits audio signals and environment monitoring signals.
Functionsl Provides 12 audio interfaces and four standard RS-232/RS-422 interfaces.l The audio interface is 600-ohm balanced, which can be set to the feed-providing mode or
non feed-providing mode for the user equipment.l The RS-232/RS-422 data port transmits services at a maximum rate of 19.2 kbit/s.l Processes the VC-12 path overheads, configures the E1 service bearer channel, monitors
the alarms and performance of the E1 service bearer channel (excluding the audio and dataservices), and communicates with the SCC unit.
l Supports inloop and outloop to test services and locate faults.l Provides the cross-connection at the 64 kbit/s level.
ApplicationThe application of the TDA board is described as follows:
l The audio interface supports the point-to-point bidirectional service, which is called theprivate line service. This type of service is mainly applied to point-to-point applicationscenarios, such as banks and post bank cards. Usually, services are transmitted by a TDAboard that is connected to a private line modem.
l The audio interface also supports the point-to-multipoint unidirectional service. This typeof service is applied to the transmission of paging information.
l The RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces transmit environmental information, power monitoringinformation, and NM information. In addition, they can form a simple network with PCs.
Table 3-20 lists the transmission distances of the audio interface and the data interface.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-31
Table 3-20 Transmission distances of the audio interface and data interface on the TDA board
Interface Type Maximum Transmission Distance
Audio interface 4000 m
RS-232 asynchronous interface 15 m
RS-422 asynchronous interface 1000 m
3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board SCBThe SCB board integrates the functions of the line, tributary, cross-connect, clock, time, SCC,and orderwire modules.
FunctionsThe SCB board of the OptiX 155/622H integrates the functions of the line, tributary, cross-connect, clock, time, SCC, and orderwire modules. The functions of each module are as follows.
Line Module
l Provides two STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16 optical interfaces. The STM-1 optical interfaceis named OI2D, the STM-4 optical interface OI4D and the STM-16 optical interface OI16D.
l The STM-1 optical interface supports the S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 interface types and usesthe SC/LC connector.
l The STM-4 optical interface supports the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 interface types and usesthe SC/LC connector.
l The STM-16 optical interface supports the S-16.1 interface type and uses the LC connector.l Provides two synchronous clock sources for the clock unit.l Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS).
Tributary Module
l Accesses 16 E1 signals.l Supports the asynchronous mapping of E1 signals to VC-12s as defined in ITU-T G.703.l Provides the 75-ohm unbalanced and 120-ohm balanced interfaces, whose characteristics
comply with the requirements specified in ITU-T G.703.l Processes the VC-12 path overheads, configures each service channel, monitors the alarms
and performance of each service channel, and communicates with the SCC unit.l Supports inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1 services or locate the fault, thus
facilitating the maintenance.l Provides the synchronous clock source for the clock unit.
Cross-Connect Module
l Supports cross-connections at the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 level, and thus grooms services fromline to line, from line to tributary, and from tributary to tributary.
l The supported higher order cross-connect capacity is 21.25 Gbit/s and the lower order cross-connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Clock and Time Module
l Provides two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s external interfaces, whose impedance is 120 ohms.
l Supports three clock working modes: trace, holdover and free-run.
l Supports the multiplexing with the SYNC external clock interface and the COM2 andCOM3 transparent data ports for outputting the time information.
SCC Module
l Exchanges information with other boards to configure equipment data and collectperformance and alarm data.
l Provides a standard Ethernet NM interface and RS-232 data terminal equipment (DTE)interface to realize the equipment management by the U2000.
l Supports the switching between the independent mode and the cooperative mode. Realizesthe hitless switching of services between the TDM domain and the packet domain.
Orderwire Module
l Provides one orderwire interface for conference call and broadcast.
l Provides four RS-232 (RJ-45 type) serial data ports for point-to-multipoint equipmentconnection and transparent transmission of data.
l Provides four input and two output housekeeping interfaces. The input housekeepinginterfaces monitor the status of the external equipment, and the output housekeepinginterfaces output alarm indications and control the external equipment.
Application
As the core of the OptiX 155/622H, the SCB board grooms services, extracts clock signals,implements inter-board communication, and provides the orderwire function. As the line andtributary modules are integrated on the SCB board, the number of slots is reduced on theequipment.
3.6 Integrated Mixed-Service Processing Board CXP(PacketMode)
The CXP board mainly provides the packet data transmission function, and can access the FEand GE services when working with the SCB board.
Functionsl Accesses, processes, and forwards the FE and GE services. Aggregates and separates FE
and GE signals.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and reception and transmission of the packet thatcomplies with IEEE 1588 V2.
l Supports the inband DCN on the Ethernet.
Table 3-21 shows the functional features of the CXP board.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-33
Table 3-21 Functional features of the CXP board
Functional Feature Description
Number of FE electrical interfaces 4
Number of FE optical interfaces 2
Number of GE optical interfaces 4
Connector RJ-45 LC
Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX,1000Base-SX/LX/VX/ZX
Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP opticalmodule.Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10km, 40 km, or 80 km through the opticalinterfaces.Supports the colored optical interface.
Working mode FE electricalinterfaces
Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex
FE optical interface 100M full-duplex
GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex
Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at theEthernet port.
l Supports the settings of loop mode, queryof port status, query of optical interfacetype, and others.
Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port.l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet
port.
Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function.Supports the frame encapsulation formatsthat comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports ajumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600bytes.
Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service.l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr
service.
QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities,including the simple flow classification andcomplex flow classification of the VLANpacket and MPLS packet, and the bandwidthlimit function.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Functional Feature Description
Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supportsup to eight LAG members.
Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1protection.
l Supports the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1protection.
l Supports the LAG protection.
Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock.l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant
time synchronization.
Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults byproviding alarms and performance eventsto facilitate management and maintenanceof the equipment. These alarms andperformance events are related to theEthernet interface connection failure,installation of an improper opticalmodule, and shut-down of laser.
l Supports the hot swapping of opticalmodule and query of optical module.
l Supports the RMOM counting function.l Supports the warm reset and cold reset.
MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies withITU-T Y.1711.
ETH-OAM Supports the ETH-OAM that complies withIEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah.
VLAN tags Each port supports 4K VLAN tags.
Number of traffic classes supported by thesystem
1024
ETH OAM instances supported by the system 256
Number of E-line services 1024
Number of E-Aggr services 4
E1 CES 16
Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnelsValue range of the label: 16 to 32K
Number of static PWs 512Value range of the label: 16 to 32K
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-35
Functional Feature Description
PW OAM Supports the PW OAM that complies withITU-T Y.1711.
Number of QinQ links 1024
Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protectiongroups and number of MPLS PW 1+1/1:1protection groups
The maximum sum of the number of MPLStunnel protection groups and the number ofMPLS PW protection groups is 128.
WARNINGMPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label mustbe different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range(16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time.
On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be aconsecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.
Applicationl The CXP board supports the configuration of the E-Line and E-Aggr services.
l The CXP board provides the FE and GE optical interfaces to interconnect with the 100Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s optical interfaces.
3.7 Environment Monitoring Unit EMUThe EMU board monitors the environment.
Functions
The environment monitoring unit EMU provides the following environment monitoringfunctions:
l Monitors the voltage of two channels of -48 V power supply.
l Monitors the working temperature of the equipment.
l Provides 12 housekeeping inputs and six housekeeping outputs.
l Provides 1-channel RS-232/RS-422 serial communication.
Applicationl This board detects and monitors the voltage of two channels of power supply at the same
time, and reports the result to the U2000.
l This board monitors the working temperature of the OptiX 155/622H, and reports the resultto the U2000.
l This board inputs external alarms and outputs equipment alarms through the housekeepinginterface.
l The serial interface can be set to RS-232 or RS-422 to transparently transmit serialcommunication information of other equipment, such as the monitoring information.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
3.8 Power Converter System UPMThe uninterruptible power module (UPM) is a 220 V AC to -48 V DC power converter systemthat is used only by the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM consists of the double-channel hot backupAC/DC converter module, monitoring module, and storage battery.
Figure 3-5 shows the composition of the UPM.
Figure 3-5 Composition of the UPM
RS232
- 48 VDC
Powerbox
Rectifiermodule
ACinput Communication
interface
Storagebattery
3.8.1 FunctionsThe UPM functions as a backup of the equipment power supply. When the mains supply isinterrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage batteries to supply power, thus ensuringthe uninterrupted power supply.
3.8.2 UPM Power Converter BoxThe UPM power converter box can convert power supplies.
3.8.3 Storage BatteryThe storage battery can be installed in the storage battery box or on the storage battery tray.When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage battery tosupply power, thus ensuring uninterrupted power supply.
3.8.1 FunctionsThe UPM functions as a backup of the equipment power supply. When the mains supply isinterrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage batteries to supply power, thus ensuringthe uninterrupted power supply.
l The UPM provides two AC/DC rectifier modules with the hot backup design for powerconversion. If one rectifier module fails, the other rectifier module takes over the loadimmediately so that the ongoing services are not affected. This feature significantlyimproves the stability of the system. Each rectifier module can support a load of 250 W.When only one rectifier module works, it can ensure that two sets of OptiX 155/622H infull configuration function normally or that four sets of OptiX 155/622H in standardconfiguration function normally.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-37
l The UPM provides the monitoring module, which combines the functions of powermonitoring and NMS monitoring. The monitoring module monitors and controls theparameters and status of the rectifier module, AC/DC power distribution, and storagebattery group in real time, and then reports the parameters and status to the U2000. Thestorage batteries support the automatic management and the protection function. Themonitoring module automatically measures the charging and discharging currents of thestorage batteries, and controls the rectifier module to perform even charging, floatingcharging and current limitation on the storage batteries.
l The UPM provides protection for the storage batteries. When the mains supply isinterrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage batteries to supply power. Thestorage batteries can provide a normal power supply of five to six hours for the OptiX155/622H in standard configuration.
3.8.2 UPM Power Converter BoxThe UPM power converter box can convert power supplies.
The dimensions of the UPM power converter box are 436 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H).
Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7 show the appearance of the power converter box.
Figure 3-6 Appearance of the power converter box
Figure 3-7 Rear view of the power converter box
AC100~240
ALM Vout ALM Vout
ALMRUN
RS-232
Rectifiermodule
Communicationinterface Storage battery
interface
Load Load
ACinput
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
3.8.3 Storage BatteryThe storage battery can be installed in the storage battery box or on the storage battery tray.When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM automatically enables the storage battery tosupply power, thus ensuring uninterrupted power supply.
Storage Battery BoxThe dimensions of the storage battery box are 436 mm (W) x 315 mm (D) x 133 mm (H).
Figure 3-8 shows the appearance of the storage battery box.
Figure 3-8 Storage battery box
Storage Battery TrayThe storage battery tray can house the storage batteries of two types: 12 Ah and 20 Ah.
The dimensions of the storage battery tray are 436 mm (W) x 173.5 mm (D) x 125 mm (H).
Figure 3-9 shows the appearance of the storage battery tray.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-39
Figure 3-9 Storage battery tray
3.9 Software Architecture
3.9.1 OverviewThe software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and workswith other modules.
3.9.2 Communication ProtocolsComplete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 andQ.812.
3.9.3 Board SoftwareThe board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation ofthe board.
3.9.4 NE SoftwareThe NE software manages, monitors and controls the board running on the NE. In addition, theNE software functions as a communication service unit between the U2000 and the boards sothat the U2000 can control and manage the NE.
3.9.5 Network Management SystemThe NM system implements unified management over the optical transmission network, andmaintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
3.9.1 OverviewThe software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and workswith other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software andNM system.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchicalstructure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functionsand provides service for the upper layer.
Figure 3-10 shows the system software architecture.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "BoardSoftware".
Figure 3-10 Software architecture
High LevelCommunication Module
Communication Module
Equipment ManagementModule
Real-timemulti-taskoperatingsystem
NE software
Network ManagementSystem
Board Software
DatabaseManagement
Module
Network side Module
3.9.2 Communication ProtocolsComplete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 andQ.812.
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE)equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) areprovided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on thebasis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through modem, IP layer uses serial line internetprotocol (SLIP).
3.9.3 Board SoftwareThe board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation ofthe board.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-41
It receives the commands issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NEsoftware through performance events and alarms.
The specific functions include:
l Alarm managementl Performance managementl Configuration managementl Communication management
It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-Tcompliant specific functions of the NE.
3.9.4 NE SoftwareThe NE software manages, monitors and controls the board running on the NE. In addition, theNE software functions as a communication service unit between the U2000 and the boards sothat the U2000 can control and manage the NE.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at the unit management layer in thetelecommunication management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediationfunction (MF) and the OS function at the network unit layer.
Data communication function (DCF) provides the communication channel between NE andother equipment (including the mediation device, the U2000 and other NEs).
l Real-Time Multi-Task Operating SystemThe NE software offers a real-time multi-task operating system to manage public resourcesand support application programs.It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application programexecution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware.
l Communication and Control ModuleThe communication and control module is the interface module between NE software andboard software.According to related communication protocols, the communication and control moduleimplements the communication between NE software and board software for informationexchange and equipment maintenance.The communication and control module issues the board maintenance and operationcommands sent from the NE software to the boards. The communication and controlmodule also reports the status, alarm and performance events of the boards to the NEsoftware.
l Network Side (NS) ModuleThe NS module is between the communication module and the equipment managementmodule. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer)and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:– Qx interface module– Command line interface (CLI) module– Security management module
l Equipment Management Module
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for implementing NEmanagement. It includes administrator and agent.
The administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.
The agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implementthe operations on the managed object, and send performance events according to the statuschange of the managed object.
l High-Level Communication Module
The high-level communication module implements the Message Communication Function(MCF) in the functional block of the transmission network equipment. It provides hardwareinterfaces through the control board, transports the Operation, Administration,Maintenance, and Provision (OAM&P) information, and exchanges managementinformation between the U2000 and the NEs and between the NEs.
It consists of the network communication module, serial communication module and ECCcommunication module.
l Database Management Module
The database management module is an important part of the NE software.
It includes two independent parts: data and program.
The data is organized in the form of database, including the network database, alarmdatabase, performance database and equipment database.
The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
3.9.5 Network Management SystemThe NM system implements unified management over the optical transmission network, andmaintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standardmanagement information model as well as object-oriented management technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitorand manage the network equipment.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmissionnetwork to help operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment.
The management functions of the NM software include:
l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, andcounts alarms in real time; implements alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and faultdiagnosis.
l Performance management: configures performance monitoring; browses, analyzes andprints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; resetsperformance register.
l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,subnets and time.
l Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE loginmanagement, NE login locking, NE setting locking and local craft terminal (LCT) accesscontrol of the equipment.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Product Architecture
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-43
l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown(ALS) and optical fiber power detection; collects equipment data to help the maintenancepersonnel in troubleshooting.
3 Product Architecture
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
3-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
4 Data Features
About This Chapter
The data features include Ethernet features, ATM features, and DDN features.
4.1 Ethernet FeaturesThis topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the Ethernet features of theOptiX 155/622H.
4.2 ATM FeaturesThis topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX155/622H.
4.3 DDN FeaturesThis topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX 155/622H.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
4.1 Ethernet FeaturesThis topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the Ethernet features of theOptiX 155/622H.
4.1.1 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H provides various types of Ethernet boards to meet the requirements ofdifferent Ethernet services.
4.1.2 ApplicationThe OptiX 155/622H provides the Ethernet service access function that is integrated on the SDHtransmission platform. Hence, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit voice services and data servicesat the same time.
4.1.3 ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for Ethernet services.
4.1.1 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H provides various types of Ethernet boards to meet the requirements ofdifferent Ethernet services.
Table 4-1 lists the Ethernet boards that support the ML-PPP encapsulation protocol. Table4-2 lists the Ethernet boards that support the GFP encapsulation protocol.
Table 4-1 Functions of the ET1, ET1O, ET1D, and EF1 boards
Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1
Number of FEelectrical interfaces
8 8 2 4
Number of FE opticalinterfaces
- - - 2
Type of connector RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Electricalinterface:RJ-45Opticalinterface: LC
Valid slot IU4 IU4 IU1, IU2, andIU3
IU4
Workingmode
Electricalinterface
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/100/ full-duplex, 10M/100M half-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
Opticalinterface
- - - 100M full-duplex
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Board Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1
Encapsulationprotocol
ML-PPP
Uplink bandwidth onthe SDH side
1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4
Bound bandwidth 48xVC-12 48xVC-12 16xVC-12 48xVC-12
Number ofVCTRUNKs
16 16 16 16
Layer 2 switching - Supported Supported Supported
VLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported
EPL Supported - Supported -
EVPL - - - -
EPLAN - Supported Supported Supported
EVPLAN - - - -
Spanning tree - Supported Supported Supported
IGMP Snooping - Supported Supported Supported
RMON Supported Supported Supported Supported
Table 4-2 Functions of the EFS, EFS4, EFT, EGS, EFSC, ELT2, and EGT boards
Function EFS EFSC EGS EFT ELT2 EGT EFS4
Number ofFE electricalinterfaces
4 12 - 4 - - 4
Number ofFE opticalinterfaces
- - - - 2 - -
Number ofGE opticalinterfaces
- - 1 - - 1 -
Type ofconnector
RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45 LC LC RJ-45
Valid slot IU1, IU2,and IU3
IU4 IU1,IU2,andIU3
IU1,IU2,andIU3
IU1,IU2,and IU3
IU1,IU2,and IU3
IU1, IU2,and IU3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
Function EFS EFSC EGS EFT ELT2 EGT EFS4
Workingmode
FEelectricalinterfaces
Auto-negotiation, 10M/100M full-duplex,10M/100M half-duplex
Auto-negotiation,10M/10Mfull-duplex,10M/100Mhalf-duplex
- Auto-negotiation,10M/100Mfull-duplex
- - Auto-negotiation, 100Mfull-duplex
FEopticalinterfaces
- - - - 100Mfull-duplex
- -
GEopticalinterfaces
- - 100Mfull-duplex
- - Auto-negotiation,1000Mfull-duplex
-
Uplinkbandwidth onthe SDH side
4xVC-4 4xVC-4 4xVC-4
2xVC-4
2xVC-4 2xVC-4 4xVC-4
Boundbandwidth
12xVC-3or126xVC-12 +6xVC-3
12xVC-3 or126xVC-12 +6xVC-3
12xVC-3 or126xVC12 +6xVC-3
6xVC-3 or63xVC12 +3xVC-3
6xVC-3or63xVC12 +3xVC-3
6xVC-3or63xVC-12
12xVC-3or63xVC-12 +9xVC-3
Number ofVCTRUNKs
24 24 24 4 2 1 8
Layer 2switching
Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
VLAN Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
EVPL Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
EPL Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
EPLAN Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Function EFS EFSC EGS EFT ELT2 EGT EFS4
EVPLAN Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
Spanningtree
Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
GFP Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
LAPS - - - Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
HDLC - - - Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
LPT Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Test frame Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
CAR Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
CoS Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
Trafficmanagement
- - - - - - Supported
Queuemanagement
- - - - - - Supported
IGMPSnooping
Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
LCAS V2 Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
EthernetOAM
Supported Supported
Supported
- - - Supported
RMON Supported Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
QinQ - - - - - - Supported
Portmirroring
- - - - - - Supported
Intra-boardLAG
- - - - - - Supported
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
4.1.2 ApplicationThe OptiX 155/622H provides the Ethernet service access function that is integrated on the SDHtransmission platform. Hence, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit voice services and data servicesat the same time.
The OptiX 155/622H supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL servicel EVPL servicel EPLAN servicel EVPLAN service
EPL ServiceThe EPL realizes the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown inFigure 4-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination nodesthorough their respective VCTRUNKs. This ensures secure and reliable data transmission. Inaddition, the Ethernet services are protected by the SDH self-healing network.
Figure 4-1 PORT-based EPL service
VCTRUNK 1PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
B B
A
PORT2
OptiX 155/622H Enterprise user
EVPL ServiceThe OptiX 155/622H supports the following two types of EVPL service:
PORT-shared EVPL: The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share the bandwidth. Asshown in Figure 4-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according toVLAN ID, to distinguish services from different departments of company A. The two servicesare transmitted over their respective VCTRUNKs.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 4-2 PORT-shared EVPL service
Headquarters of company A
NE 1 NE 2
Department 1 of company A
Department 2 of company A
OptiX 155/622H Enterprise user
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL: The OptiX 155/622H can converge and distribute the EVPL servicein the following two modes.
l The VLAN ID-based mode, as shown in Figure 4-3.l The QinQ-based mode, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-3 VLAN ID-based EVPL service
VCTRUNK
A A'
NE 1 NE 2
B
Community User Cyber cafe user OptiX 155/622H
VLAN100VLAN200
VLAN100VLAN200
PORT2PORT1 PORT 1PORT2
B'
Figure 4-4 QinQ-based EVPL service
Branch 1
NE 1 NE 2
Company A
C-Aware
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
OptiX 155/622H
Department B
Add label Strip label
Department A Department A
Department B
Branch 2
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
EPLAN ServiceThrough the EPLAN service, NEs can dynamically share the bandwidth. The OptiX 155/622Huses the virtual bridge (VB) or pure bridge to implement the layer 2 switching of Ethernet data.This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can created one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media accesscontrol (MAC) address table. This table is updated periodically by self-learning. The accesseddata is transmitted according to the destination MAC address. See Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 EPLAN service
NE 1 NE 2
OptiX 155/622H
NE3Department 3 of company A
Access point
Port 1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VBVB
VCTRUNK1
VB
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1PORT1
Department 2 of company ADepartment 1 of company A
Port 1 Port 1
Company A
EVPLAN ServiceThrough the EVPLAN service, NEs can dynamically share the bandwidth and the serviceisolation between data of the same VLAN can be implementd. When the data services with thesame VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, theEVPLAN service an meet the service requirement.
As shown in Figure 4-6, the Ethernet board of the OptiX 155/622H uses the VB+VLAN filtertable to implement the EVPLAN service.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 4-6 EVPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
Company A OptiX 155/622H
NE3
Access point
Port2LSPPort1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1PORT2
VCTRUNK2
Department 1of company A
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
Company B
LSP LSP PORT1PORT2
VC
TRU
NK
1
PO
RT1
PO
RT2
VC
TRU
NK
2
UNIVB1
VB1
VB1
UNI
UNI UNI
UNI
UNI
Port1
Port2
Port1Port2
Department 1of company B
Department 2of company A
Department 3of company B
Department 3of company A
Department 2of company B
4.1.3 ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for Ethernet services.
l At the Ethernet service layer, the OptiX 155/622H supports the following protectionschemes:– Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)– Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)/Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)– Link state pass through (LPT)– Link aggregation group (LAG)– Port protection switching (PPS)
l At the optical transmission layer, the OptiX 155/622H supports the multiplex sectionprotection (MSP) and sub-network connection protection (SNCP) schemes.
LCAS
LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtualconcatenation. LCAS provide the following functions:
l When applied to the virtual concatenation technology, LCAS can be used for configuringthe system capacity, increasing or decreasing the number of concatenated VCs, anddynamically changing the bearer bandwidth.
l LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 4-7, LCAS can dynamically add or delete members according to therequirements, and can thus dynamically increase or decrease the bandwidth. Services are notinterrupted during the bandwidth adjustment.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
Figure 4-7 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment by using LCAS
The bandwidth of 10M is need.Member
Headquarters
Branch
MSTP network
OptiX 155/622H
Headquarters
Member
Member
Member
New member
Branch
As shown in Figure 4-8, LCAS protects the Ethernet services. When certain members fail, theyare automatically deleted, whereas other members transmit data normally. This ensures that theconcatenation group is available. When the failed members are available again, they areautomatically restored and data is loaded to these members again.
Figure 4-8 Protection for the virtual concatenation group through LCAS
Failed member
Delete the failed memberHeadquarters
Branch
Branch
OptiX 155/622H
MSTP-networkMember
Member
Member
Member
Headquarters
For more details on LCAS, see LCAS in the Feature Description of this product.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
STP/RSTPThe Ethernet board supports STP and RSTP. When STP or RSTP is enabled, the networktopology is modified logically to prevent a broadcast storm. STP or RSTP realizes link protectionby restructuring the topology.
For more details on STP and RSTP, see STP and RSTP in the Feature Description of this product.
LPTLPT is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports betweenrouters belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the workinglink becomes faulty, the LPT function is used to shut down the local port so that the peer routeris informed of the abnormality of the working link. Hence, services are switched from the activeport to the standby port and the services are protected.
The LPT function has two modes, point-to-point (P2P) and point-to-multipoint (P2MP).
For more details on LPT, see LPT in the Feature Description of this product.
LAGLAG means that multiple links connecting to the same device are bound to increase thebandwidth and enhance the link reliability. The aggregated links can be regarded as one link.The features of LAG are as follows:
l Improving the link availabilityIn an LAG, the LAG members back up each other dynamically. When a link is interrupted,another LAG member can take over its work immediately.
l Increasing the link bandwidthLAG provides an economical method for you to improve the link transmission rate. Bybinding multiple physical links, you can obtain a data link with higher bandwidth withoutupgrading the existing equipment. The total bandwidth of the link after aggregation is thesum of the bandwidth of the physical links.– Load sharing: The physical links of the same group can share the data traffic and back
up each other.– Higher reliability: The members of the same group back up each other dynamically.
For more information on the LAG, see LAG in the Feature Description of this product.
MSP and SNCPMSP enables the signal between and including two multiplex section terminations (MSTs) toswitch from the working section over to the protection section.
The principle of SNCP is "dual transmission and selective reception". The service receiverselects the better service from the two service sources sent by the service sender.
The Ethernet services support MSP and SNCP at the optical transmission layer.
4.2 ATM FeaturesThis topic describes the functions, application, and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX155/622H.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-11
4.2.1 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H provides two types of ATM processing boards: AIUD and AIUQ.
4.2.2 ApplicationThe OptiX 155/622H supports the application of several types of ATM services.
4.2.3 ProtectionThe ATM services of the OptiX 155/622H are protected at several layers.
4.2.1 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H provides two types of ATM processing boards: AIUD and AIUQ.
The AIUD board can access and process two STM-1 ATM services and the AIUQ board canaccess and process four STM-1 ATM services.
Table 4-3 lists the functions of the AIUD and AIUQ boards.
Table 4-3 Functions of the AIUD and AIUQ boards
Item AIUD AIUQ
Interface on the frontpanel
2xSTM-1 4xSTM-1
Optical interfacetype
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, andVe-1.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, andVe-1.2
Type of connector LC
Optical module type SFP
Mapping mode VC-4
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514 and ATM forum TM 4.0
ATM multicastconnection
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, loopback (LB), and Continuity check (CC)
4.2.2 ApplicationThe OptiX 155/622H supports the application of several types of ATM services.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Supported Service Types and Traffic Typesl The CBR service applies to the voice service, and the video service and circuit emulation
service of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidthand latency.
l The rt-VBR service applies to the audio and video service of a variable rate.
l The nrt-VBR service is mainly used for data transmission.
l The UBR service is generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
The service types and traffic types supported by the OptiX 155/622H meet the requirementsspecified in IETF RFC 2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNT 3.1. For more details,see Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 ATM service types and traffic types
No. Traffic Type ServiceType
Parameter
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR -
2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth-Exclusive ATM Services
When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processingboards at the ATM layer of only the source NE and sink NE. On intermediate NEs, only theSDH timeslot pass-through is performed for these ATM services, without ATM layer processing.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-13
In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATMservices are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 4-9, the 155 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE2 exclusively occupy aVC-4 bandwidth each. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the twoservices reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are outputthrough the 622 Mbit/s optical port.
Figure 4-9 Application of bandwidth-exclusive ATM services
NE 2 NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
155M ATM Traffic
155M ATM Traffic 622M ATM Traffic
Service Convergence
DSLAM
RouterDSLAM
STM-4 SDH Ring
Application of Bandwidth-Shared ATM ServicesThe VP-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing forATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC4 path and are processed atthe ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 4-10, NE1 accesses 155Mbit/s ATM services from the ATM board andsends these services to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1or 1:1). Then, after these services are encapsulated into VC-4, they are sent to the line by thecross-connect board. NE2 accesses 155Mbit/s ATM services from the optical port, and thenperforms the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM servicesfrom NE1 are dropped at NE2 for the processing at ATM layer. Then, the locally accessedservices and the services from the upstream NE are encapsulated into the same VC-4 and sentto the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring or VC-Ringhas a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 4-10 VP/VC-Ring
VC4VP/VC-Ring
NE 2
NE 4
NE 1
NE 3 155M ATM Traffic
155M ATM Traffic
622M ATM Traffic
The ATM traffic from NE1 isdropped to the NE2,and then
send to VC/VP-Ring aftercoverged with local service
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM
155M ATM Traffic
4.2.3 ProtectionThe ATM services of the OptiX 155/622H are protected at several layers.
The available protection schemes are as follows:
l Protection schemes at the ATM layerl Protection schemes at the optical transmission layer, such as MSP and SNCP
Protection Schemes at the ATM Layer
Compliant with ITU-T I.630, protection schemes at the ATM layer are classified in differentways. For more details, see Table 4-5. You can select a combination of the following typesaccording to the requirement, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.
Table 4-5 Classification of ATM protection schemes
Item Protection Type
Classification Scheme 1+1 protection 1:1 protection
Switching direction Unidirectional protection Bidirectional protection
Connection level VPC protection VCC protection
Protection domain Trail protection Sub-Network ConnectionProtection (SNCP)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-15
Item Protection Type
Revertive mode Revertive Non-revertive
Protected Object Single connection protection Group connection protection
Protection Schemes at the Optical Transmission LayerThe ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer,where MSP and SNCP are available. You can set the hold-off time of for the ATM protectionswitching. When the network impairment occurs, the MSP or SNCP switching at the opticaltransmission layer can be triggered first. This realizes the protection for the working ATMservice (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not triggered.)
4.3 DDN FeaturesThis topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX 155/622H.
4.3.1 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H uses the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards to access and process DDN services.
4.3.2 ApplicationWhen the DDN board is configured in the OptiX 155/622H, the SDH network can access andgroom DDN services.
4.3.3 ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H provides the MSP and SNCP protection schemes on the SDH side.
4.3.1 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H uses the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards to access and process DDN services.
l The N64 board provides two V.35/V.21/RS-449/EIA-530 interfaces and two Framed E1interfaces.
l The N64Q board provides four V.35/X.24/RS-449/V.24/RS-530/RS-530A interfaces.l The FP2D board accesses 16 Framed E1 signals and provides time division cross-connect
services at the 64 kbit/s level.
Table 4-6 lists the functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 4-6 Functions of the N64, N64Q, and FP2D boards
BoardFeature
N64 N64Q FP2D
Processingcapability
Performs timeslot cross-connection for two NM ortwo monitoring signals (atNx64 kbit/s), and E1services (two E1 signalsfrom the interface side oreight E1 signals from theline side), thus realizingre-integration of E1services and timeslotextraction.
Converts four Nx64kbit/s service signalsinto E1 signals andperforms timeslot cross-connection, thusrealizing re-integrationof E1 services andtimeslot extraction.
Accesses 16 Framed E1signals and providestime division cross-connect services at the64 kbit/s level.
Interfacespecification
Nx64 kbit/s interface: V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530Framed E1 interface:CRC4 and non-CRC4
Nx64 kbit/s interface:V.35/X.21/RS-449/V.24/RS-530/RS-530A
Framed E1 interface:CRC4 and non-CRC4
Type ofconnector
2 mm HM 2 mm HM DB78
Protection
Not supported Not supported Not supported
Loopback
Supports inloop andoutloop for all ports.
Supports inloop andoutloop for all ports.
Supports inloop andoutloop for all ports.
Alarmandperformance event
Provides abundant alarmsand performance events,which facilitatemanagement andmaintenance for theequipment.
Provides abundantalarms and performanceevents, which facilitatesmanagement andmaintenance for theequipment.
Provides abundantalarms and performanceevents, which facilitatesmanagement andmaintenance for theequipment.
4.3.2 ApplicationWhen the DDN board is configured in the OptiX 155/622H, the SDH network can access andgroom DDN services.
The N64 and N64Q boards mainly apply to point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint transmission of the video conference system and routers, and convergence in thecase of multi-point routers access, thus realizing the accessing of the V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 multi-protocol interface services and Framed E1 services into transmission networks.
The FP2D board is applicable to the DDN private networks of small and medium-sizedenterprises, government departments, banks, or security business halls.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Data Features
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-17
4.3.3 ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H provides the MSP and SNCP protection schemes on the SDH side.
4 Data Features
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
4-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
5 Packet Feature
About This Chapter
The OptiX 155/622H supports installation of a board with the packet feature. With such a board,the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet domain to transmit data on the two domains.Thus, the smooth evolution from the TDM network to the packet network is realized.
5.1 MPLSThe OptiX 155/622H uses the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transmit theEthernet service on the packet mode. This topic describes the concept of the MPLS and itsapplication scenario on the equipment.
5.2 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H provides the CXP board with the packet switching function to meet therequirement of the packet feature.
5.3 ApplicationOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the Ethernet service and E1 CES service.
5.4 ProtectionOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports several protection schemes, such as MPLStunnel/PW 1+1/1:1 and LAG.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Packet Feature
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5.1 MPLSThe OptiX 155/622H uses the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transmit theEthernet service on the packet mode. This topic describes the concept of the MPLS and itsapplication scenario on the equipment.
5.1.1 BackgroundThe MPLS was originally presented to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, theMPLS is providing solutions for the backbone routing and virtual private network (VPN).
5.1.2 Basic ConceptsTo learn about the MPLS technology, you need to learn about its concepts first, including theforwarding equivalence class (FEC), label, label distribution protocol (LDP), and label switchedpath (LSP).
5.1.3 System StructureThe MPLS uses the forwarding plane to manage the packet service.
5.1.4 Capability of Supporting the MPLS TechnologyBy using the MPLS technology, the OptiX 1555/622H not only greatly increases the packetforwarding speed but also provides the capability of seamlessly connecting to Layer 2 networkssuch as Ethernet. In addition, the OptiX 1555/622H provides better solutions for application ofthe TE, VPN, and QoS.
5.1.1 BackgroundThe MPLS was originally presented to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, theMPLS is providing solutions for the backbone routing and virtual private network (VPN).
The MPLS is integrated with the Layer 3 routing function of the IP network and the highlyeffective forwarding mechanism of the traditional Layer 2 network. Similar to the forwardingscheme of the existing Layer 2 network, the forwarding plane is connection-oriented. Hence,the MPLS can realize seamless connection between IP and Layer 2 networks such as the ATMnetwork and Ethernet. In addition, the MPLS provides better solutions for the application of thetraffic engineering (TE), VPN, and quality of service (QoS). Hence, the MPLS becomes acriterion for expanding the data network and increasing the network operability.
To better meet the requirements of the transport network for service quality, the connectionlessfeature of the standard MPLS should be simplified, and the OAM and protection capabilitiesshould be enhanced. The OptiX 155/622H supports a series of MPLS features that are applicableto the transport network.
5.1.2 Basic ConceptsTo learn about the MPLS technology, you need to learn about its concepts first, including theforwarding equivalence class (FEC), label, label distribution protocol (LDP), and label switchedpath (LSP).
FECAs a classification forwarding technology, the MPLS considers the packets of the sameforwarding scheme as a class, which is called an FEC. On the MPLS network, the packets in theFEC are processed in the same manner.
5 Packet Feature
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Label
A label is a short identifier of fixed length and is valid locally (only in the MPLS domain). Thelabel is used to identify the FEC that one packet belongs to. In certain cases, for example, whenload sharing is required, several labels may correspond to one FEC, but one label indicates oneFEC only.
The packet headers carry labels and the labels do not contain any topology information. Labelsare valid locally. A label has four bytes, which are encapsulated in the manner shown in Figure5-1.
Figure 5-1 Encapsulation structure of the label
Label19 22 23
TTL31
SExp0
A label has the following four fields.
l Label: 20 bits. This field indicates the label value and is used as a forwarding pointer.l Exp: 3 bits. This field is reserved for tests and currently used for class of service (CoS).l S: 1 bit. This field is an identifier at the bottom of a stack. The MPLS supports the layered
labels, or multiple labels. If S is 1, it indicates that the label is at the bottom.l TTL: 8 bits. This field has the same indication as the time to live (TTL) of IP packets.
Similar to the VPI/VCI for ATM, the label is a connection identifier. In the case of realizing theMPLS over Ethernet, the label is encapsulated between the Ethernet frame header and the IPlayer. Figure 5-2 shows the encapsulation location of the label in a packet.
Figure 5-2 Encapsulation location of the labels in a packet
Ethernet/PPP header Label Layer 3 data
Ethernet/SDH packet
LDP
The LDP is the control protocol for the MPLS. Similar to the signaling protocol of the traditionalnetwork, the LDP is responsible for creation and maintenance of LSP and PW, FECclassification, and label distribution.
The MPLS can use the following types of LDPs:
l Protocols that are exclusively stipulated for label distribution, such as LDP and constraint-routing label distribution protocol (CR-LDP)
l Existing protocols that can be extended to support label distribution, such as border gatewayprotocol (BGP)
LSP
On the MPLS network, the path that an FEC travels through is called an LSP.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Packet Feature
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
An LSP is a unidirectional path from the ingress to the egress. Each node on an LSP is a labelswitched router (LSR). According to the data transport direction, adjacent LSRs are respectivelycalled upstream LSR and downstream LSR.
LSPs are classified into two types: static LSP and dynamic LSP. The static LSP is manuallyconfigured by the administrator, whereas the dynamic LSP is created dynamically by the LDP.
The OptiX 155/622H supports the static LSP only.
5.1.3 System StructureThe MPLS uses the forwarding plane to manage the packet service.
The forwarding plane is also called the data plane, which is connection-oriented and uses Layer2 networks such as Ethernet. The MPLS uses short labels of fixed length to encapsulate packets.The forwarding plane then fast forwards the encapsulated packets.
5.1.4 Capability of Supporting the MPLS TechnologyBy using the MPLS technology, the OptiX 1555/622H not only greatly increases the packetforwarding speed but also provides the capability of seamlessly connecting to Layer 2 networkssuch as Ethernet. In addition, the OptiX 1555/622H provides better solutions for application ofthe TE, VPN, and QoS.
On the OptiX 1555/622H, the supported MPLS technical features are as listed in Table 5-1 andthe supported performance indexes are as listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-1 MPLS technical features supported by the OptiX 1555/622H
Feature Description
Basic MPLSfunctions
Supports the basic functions and service forwarding.
Realizes the multi-service access network by using the LSP tunneltechnology.
Supports the static tunnel.
MPLS OAM Supports MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
Supports the ping command and traceroute command for the MPLS tunnel.Supports the LSP availability test by using the MPLS echo request andMPLS echo reply.
MPLSprotection
Supports the MPLS tunnel/PW 1+1/1:1 protection.
Others Supports the TE based on the MPLS tunnel.
Supports the QoS.
5 Packet Feature
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 5-2 MPLS performance indexes supported by the OptiX 1555/622H
Feature Description
Number of MPLS tunnels 512
Number of PWs 512
5.2 FunctionsThe OptiX 155/622H provides the CXP board with the packet switching function to meet therequirement of the packet feature.
Table 5-3 shows the principal functional features of the CXP board when this board works withthe SCB board.
Table 5-3 Functional features of the CXP board
Functional Feature Description
Number of FE electrical interfaces 4
Number of FE optical interfaces 2
Number of GE optical interfaces 4
Connector RJ-45 LC
Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX,1000Base-SX/LX/VX/ZX
Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP opticalmodule.Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10km, 40 km, or 80 km through the opticalinterfaces.Supports the colored optical interface.
Working mode FE electricalinterfaces
Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex
FE optical interface 100M full-duplex
GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex
Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at theEthernet port.
l Supports the settings of loop mode, queryof port status, query of optical interfacetype, and others.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Packet Feature
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
Functional Feature Description
Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port.l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet
port.
Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function.Supports the frame encapsulation formatsthat comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports ajumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600bytes.
Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service.l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr
service.
QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities,including the simple flow classification andcomplex flow classification of the VLANpacket and MPLS packet, and the bandwidthlimit function.
Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supportsup to eight LAG members.
Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1protection.
l Supports the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1protection.
l Supports the LAG protection.
Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock.l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant
time synchronization.
Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults byproviding alarms and performance eventsto facilitate management and maintenanceof the equipment. These alarms andperformance events are related to theEthernet interface connection failure,installation of an improper opticalmodule, and shut-down of laser.
l Supports the hot swapping of opticalmodule and query of optical module.
l Supports the RMOM counting function.l Supports the warm reset and cold reset.
MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies withITU-T Y.1711.
ETH-OAM Supports the ETH-OAM that complies withIEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah.
5 Packet Feature
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Functional Feature Description
VLAN tags Each port supports 4K VLAN tags.
Number of traffic classes supported by thesystem
1024
ETH OAM instances supported by the system 256
Number of E-line services 1024
Number of E-Aggr services 4
E1 CES 16
Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnelsValue range of the label: 16 to 32K
Number of static PWs 512Value range of the label: 16 to 32K
PW OAM Supports the PW OAM that complies withITU-T Y.1711.
Number of QinQ links 1024
Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protectiongroups and number of MPLS PW 1+1/1:1protection groups
The maximum sum of the number of MPLStunnel protection groups and the number ofMPLS PW protection groups is 128.
WARNINGMPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label mustbe different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range(16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time.
On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be aconsecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.
5.3 ApplicationOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the Ethernet service and E1 CES service.
5.3.1 Ethernet ServiceOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit the data service in two Ethernet serviceforms (that is, E-Line and E-Aggr), which are specified by the Mobile Entertainment Forum(MEF) standardization organization.5.3.2 CES ServiceOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the UNI-NNI E1 CES service and UNI-UNIE1 CES service.
5.3.1 Ethernet ServiceOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H can transmit the data service in two Ethernet serviceforms (that is, E-Line and E-Aggr), which are specified by the Mobile Entertainment Forum(MEF) standardization organization.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Packet Feature
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
E-Line ServiceThe OptiX 155/622H supports the point-to-point Ethernet service, that is, E-Line service.
Figure 5-3 shows an example of how the OptiX 155/622H supports the E-Line service.
Company A has branches in City 1 and City 3; Company B has branches in City 2 and City 3;Company C has branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Company A, Company B, andCompany C have requirements for data communication. The OptiX 155/622H can provide E-Line services for Company A, Company B, and Company C to meet their communicationrequirements. In addition, the service data between them can be separated from each other.
Figure 5-3 Example of E-Line service
Nationwide/Globalcarrier Ethernet Metro
carrier EthernetMetro
carrier Ethernet
Metrocarrier Ethernet
Company A
City 3City 1
Company A
E-Line1E-Line2E-Line3
Company C Company B
Company C Company B
City 2
E-Aggr ServiceThe OptiX 155/622H supports the multipoint-to-point Ethernet service, that is, E-Aggr service.
As shown in Figure 5-4, one carrier needs to construct a 3G network. On this network, servicesof each NodeB are aggregated and transported to the RNC. In this case, the equipment considersthe data between the NodeBs and the RNC as one service.
The total bandwidth and the other parameters such as QoS need to be set on the OptiX 155/622Haggregation node.
5 Packet Feature
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 5-4 Example of E-Aggr service
GE
FE
FE
FE
RNC
Node B
Node B
Node B
5.3.2 CES ServiceOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the UNI-NNI E1 CES service and UNI-UNIE1 CES service.
As shown in Figure 5-5, the OptiX 155/622H supports the UNI-NNI E1 CES service and UNI-UNI E1 CES service. The OptiX 155/622H accesses the TDM services through the TDMinterfaces, and CES PWs can be created between the OptiX 155/622H NEs to emulate the end-to-end TDM service. For customers, the emulated TDM service is similar to the real TDMservice.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Packet Feature
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
Figure 5-5 Example of E1 CES service
UNI-NNI
UNI-UNI
BTS
BSC
BTS
BTS
TDM E1 link
PW
Tunnel
OptiX 155/622H
Base station
Base station controller
5.4 ProtectionOn the packet mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports several protection schemes, such as MPLStunnel/PW 1+1/1:1 and LAG.
For details on the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection, see 6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1Protection Schemes.
For details on the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1 protection, see 6.2.6 PW APS Protection.
For details on the Ethernet LAG protection, see 6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board(Packet Mode).
5 Packet Feature
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
6 Protection
About This Chapter
This topic describes the comprehensive protection mechanism of the OptiX 155/622H in termsof equipment-level protection, network-level protection, and clock protection.
6.1 Equipment-Level ProtectionThe equipment-level protection supported by the OptiX 155/622H includes the 1+1 hot backupfor the power supply, board-level protection against abnormalities, 1+1 protection for theEthernet board on the TDM mode and packet mode.
6.2 Network-Level ProtectionThe network-level protection includes SDH service protection, Ethernet service protection, andATM service protection.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6.1 Equipment-Level ProtectionThe equipment-level protection supported by the OptiX 155/622H includes the 1+1 hot backupfor the power supply, board-level protection against abnormalities, 1+1 protection for theEthernet board on the TDM mode and packet mode.
6.1.1 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Input UnitThe POI/POU board of the OptiX 155/622H inputs two channels of -48 V/-60 V DC powersupply at the same time. These two channels of power supply share the load in normal cases. Ifone of them fails, the other power supply takes over the load to ensure that the equipment isoperating normally.
6.1.2 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal ConditionsThe protection schemes under abnormal conditions include power failure protection duringsoftware loading, overvoltage and undervoltage protection for the power supply, and softwareupgrading protection.
6.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (TDM Mode)On the TDM mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra-board link aggregation only.
6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode)On the packet mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra-board link aggregation and inter-board link aggregation.
6.1.1 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Input UnitThe POI/POU board of the OptiX 155/622H inputs two channels of -48 V/-60 V DC powersupply at the same time. These two channels of power supply share the load in normal cases. Ifone of them fails, the other power supply takes over the load to ensure that the equipment isoperating normally.
6.1.2 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal ConditionsThe protection schemes under abnormal conditions include power failure protection duringsoftware loading, overvoltage and undervoltage protection for the power supply, and softwareupgrading protection.
Power Failure Protection During Software LoadingThe verification function is provided for applications and data. If the software loading isinterrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot the application or data that isnot successfully loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading until the software is successfullyloaded.
Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection for the Power SupplyThe power board provides the lightning protection component to effectively protect the boardfrom being damaged by transient high voltages (such as lightning). When the voltage is too low,the central processing unit (CPU) of the board is automatically reset and then the software canre-initialize the chip.
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Software Upgrading ProtectionAs two sets of NE software are stored in the SCB board, the software of a new version can beloaded without affecting the currently running software. The software of a new version replacesthe previous version after it is confirmed to be correct. This replacement does not affect theconfiguration information that is already set or the existing services on the NE. The software ofa previous version can continue to function if software upgrading fails.
6.1.3 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (TDM Mode)On the TDM mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra-board link aggregation only.
The EFS4 board supports the intra-board LAG protection.
Table 6-1 lists the parameters of the LAG protection on the TDM mode.
Table 6-1 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board
Parameter Description
Switching conditions (Any of the conditionstriggers the switching.)
l The links of the interconnected equipmentare directly connected to each otherthrough static LAG or manual LAG, nointermediate equipment exists, and thefiber is cut in two directions. Switchingtime ≤ 500 ms.
l The links of the interconnected equipmentare directly connected to each otherthrough static LAG or manual LAG, nointermediate equipment exists, and thefiber is cut in one direction. In addition,the ports of the interconnected equipmentare set to the auto-negotiation mode.Switching time ≤ 500 ms.
l The links of the interconnected equipmentare directly connected to each otherthrough static LAG, no intermediateequipment exists, and the fiber is cut intwo directions. Switching time ≤ 3.5 s.
Restoration mode l Revertive (by default)l Non-revertive
LAG Type l Staticl Manual
Load sharing mode l Load sharingl Load non-sharing
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
6.1.4 1+1 Protection for the Ethernet Board (Packet Mode)On the packet mode, the Ethernet board supports the LAG protection, which can realize intra-board link aggregation and inter-board link aggregation.
The CXP board supports the LAG protection. Table 6-2 lists the parameters of the LAGprotection on the packet mode.
Table 6-2 LAG protection parameters of the Ethernet board
Parameter Description
Switching conditions (Any of the conditionstriggers the switching.)
l The links of the interconnected equipmentare directly connected to each otherthrough static LAG or manual LAG, nointermediate equipment exists, and thefiber is cut in two directions. Switchingtime ≤ 500 ms.
l The links of the interconnected equipmentare directly connected to each otherthrough static LAG or manual LAG, nointermediate equipment exists, and thefiber is cut in one direction. In addition,the ports of the interconnected equipmentare set to the auto-negotiation mode.Switching time ≤ 500 ms.
l The links of the interconnected equipmentare directly connected to each otherthrough static LAG, no intermediateequipment exists, and the fiber is cut intwo directions. Switching time ≤ 3.5 s.
Restoration mode l Revertive (by default)l Non-revertive
LAG Type l Staticl Manual
Load sharing mode l Load sharingl Load non-sharing
6.2 Network-Level ProtectionThe network-level protection includes SDH service protection, Ethernet service protection, andATM service protection.
6.2.1 SDH Service ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H supports the linear MSP, ring MSP, SNCP, inter-ring service protection,and fiber-shared virtual trail protection for SDH services.
6.2.2 Ethernet Service Protection
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
The OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for data services. It supports variousprotection schemes at the Ethernet service layer and the SDH layer.
6.2.3 ATM Service ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H supports the VP/VC connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection. When thisprotection scheme is used, eight configuration modes are available.
6.2.4 LPT ProtectionLPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate transmissionnetwork, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission network to startthe backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT ensures the normaltransmission of important data.
6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection SchemesOn the packet mode, the OptiX 1555/622H supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protectionschemes. In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes, the protection channelprotects the services that are carried by the working channel. When the working channel becomesfaulty, the services are switched to the protection channel. In the case of the 1+1 protection,services are dually fed and selectively received. In the case of the 1:1 protection, services aresingly fed and received.
6.2.6 PW APS ProtectionPW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PWfails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in twotypes: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
6.2.1 SDH Service ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H supports the linear MSP, ring MSP, SNCP, inter-ring service protection,and fiber-shared virtual trail protection for SDH services.
Linear MSP
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX 155/622H supports the 1+1 and1:N (N≤5) protection schemes. If the 1:N protection scheme is used, extra services can betransmitted on the protection system. The switching time of the linear MSP is less than 50 ms,which complies with ITU-T G.841.
MSP Ring
The OptiX 155/622H supports the two-fiber MS shared protection ring, which complies withITU-T G.841. The switching time is less than 50 ms.
SNCP
The OptiX 155/622H supports SNCP, which complies with ITU-T G.841. The OptiX 155/622Hcan still ensure a switching time that is less than 50 ms even when the switching of multipleservices occurs.
Inter-Ring Service ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H provides protection for services between rings that use different protectionschemes (for example, between an SNCP ring and an MSP ring). This protection schemecomplies with ITU-T G.842.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
Figure 6-1 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-4
STM
-4
STM-1 SNCP
STM-1 SNCP
As shown in Figure 6-1, when the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-4 islogically divided into several lower order or higher order paths. These paths are connected toother links to form rings at the path layer. In addition, protection schemes, such as SNCP, canbe configured accordingly for these rings at the path layer.
6.2.2 Ethernet Service ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H provides hierarchical protection for data services. It supports variousprotection schemes at the Ethernet service layer and the SDH layer.
6.2.3 ATM Service ProtectionThe OptiX 155/622H supports the VP/VC connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection. When thisprotection scheme is used, eight configuration modes are available.
6.2.4 LPT ProtectionLPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate transmissionnetwork, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission network to startthe backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT ensures the normaltransmission of important data.
On the TDM mode, the OptiX 155/622H supports the LPT function.
In actual engineering application, data of users is accessed to the service network through theaccess equipment so that the users can exchange their data.
Based on the networking mode, LPT can be classified into point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT.
For details on the LPT feature, see LPT in the Feature Description.
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Point-to-Point LPTFigure 6-2 shows the engineering application of point-to-point LPT. When access link 1becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment RS-B of the fault information. Inthis process, the link state is passed through. After disconnecting the link between NE2 and RS-B, RS-B starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A.
Figure 6-2 Point-to-point LPT
NE1 NE2RS-A
Backupnetwork
Access link 1
Servicenetwork
RS-BAccess link 2
Point-to-Multipoint LPTFigure 6-3 shows the engineering application of point-to-multipoint LPT. On the user side, whenthe link between RS-A and NE1 becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment(NE2, NE3, and NE4) of the fault information. In this process, the link state is passed through.After disconnecting the links between NE2, NE3, NE4, and RS-B, RS-B starts the backupnetwork and sets up a new connection with RS-A.
On the network side, two modes are available for NE1: strict mode and non-strict mode. WhenLPT is set to the strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the backupnetwork only if the links between NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 are all faulty. When LPT is set tothe non-strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the backup network ifone of the links between NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 is faulty.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
Figure 6-3 Point-to-multipoint LPT
NE1 NE3RS-A
Backupnetwork
Access link 1
Servicenetwork
NE2
NE4
RS-B
Access link 2
6.2.5 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection SchemesOn the packet mode, the OptiX 1555/622H supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protectionschemes. In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes, the protection channelprotects the services that are carried by the working channel. When the working channel becomesfaulty, the services are switched to the protection channel. In the case of the 1+1 protection,services are dually fed and selectively received. In the case of the 1:1 protection, services aresingly fed and received.
The APS protocol that is used in the MPLS tunnel protection is transmitted on the protectionchannel to exchange the protocol and switching status. The equipment at both ends performsservice switching according to the protocol and switching status.
The MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes comply with ITU-T G.8031.
MPLS Tunnel 1+1 ProtectionFigure 6-4 shows the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection.
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 6-4 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection
Ethernetboard
Switching
Ethernetboard
Access
Ethernetboard
Switching
Ethernetboard
Subnetwork
Service detection point
Working path
Protection/Protocol path
Subnetwork
Access
Service detection point
In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, services are dually fed and selectively received.When the working channel becomes faulty, the receive end receives services from the protectionchannel. In this manner, service switching is realized.
l The detection method is as follows:– At the physical layer, the loss of signals is detected in every microsecond.– At the link layer, the MPLS OAM mechanism performs the detection. In the case of
FFD packets, the system supports seven types of transmit frequency: 3.33 ms, 10 ms,20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, and 500 ms; in the case of CV packets, the systemsupports the transmit frequency of 1s. To ensure that the automatic protection switchingtime of the MPLS tunnel is within 50 ms, the detection time of the MPLS OAMmechanism needs to be set to 3.33 ms.
l Switching process: The receive end selects the service according to the link status.
MPLS Tunnel 1:1 ProtectionFigure 6-5 shows the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection.
Figure 6-5 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 Protection
Ethernetboard
Switching
Ethernetboard
Ethernetboard
Switching
Ethernetboard
Access
Subnetwork
Service detection point
Working path
Protection/Protocol path
Subnetwork
Service detection point
Access
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-9
In the case of the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, services are singly fed and received. When theworking channel is normal, services are transmitted on the working channel. When the workingchannel becomes faulty, services are switched to the protection channel. The APS protocol istransmitted on the protection channel to exchange the protocol and switching status. Theequipment at both ends performs service switching according to the protocol and switchingstatus.
l The detection method is as follows:
– At the physical layer, the loss of signals is detected in every microsecond.
– At the link layer, the MPLS OAM mechanism performs the detection. To ensure thatthe automatic protection switching time of the MPLS tunnel is within 50 ms, thedetection time of the MPLS OAM mechanism needs to be set to 3.33 ms.
l Switching process: After a negotiation through the APS protocol, the transmit end switchesthe service to the protection channel, and the receive end receives the service from theprotection channel.
Protection Parameters
Table 6-3 lists the parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes.
Table 6-3 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes
SwitchingType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
Switching Mode
SwitchingTime
SwitchingDelay Time
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition(Any of theconditionstriggers theswitching)
1+1single-endedswitching
Non-revertivemode
APSprotocol
AutomaticswitchingLockoutofswitchingForcedswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
0s to 10 s - l Thehardwareorsoftwareof theboard isfaulty.
l A coldresetoccurs ontheboard.
l Aswitchingcommand ismanuallyissued.
l TheMPLSOAM
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
SwitchingType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
Switching Mode
SwitchingTime
SwitchingDelay Time
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition(Any of theconditionstriggers theswitching)
1+1dual-endedswitching
Non-revertivemode
APSprotocol
AutomaticswitchingLockoutofswitchingForcedswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
mechanism detectsan LSPfailure.
≤ 50ms
0s to 10 s -
1+1single-endedswitching
Revertivemode
APSprotocol
AutomaticswitchingLockoutofswitchingForcedswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
0s to 10 s 5 minutes
1+1dual-endedswitching
Revertivemode
APSprotocol
AutomaticswitchingLockoutofswitchingForcedswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
0s to 10 s 5 minutes
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-11
SwitchingType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
Switching Mode
SwitchingTime
SwitchingDelay Time
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition(Any of theconditionstriggers theswitching)
1:1dual-endedswitching
Non-revertivemode
APSprotocol
AutomaticswitchingLockoutofswitchingForcedswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
0s to 10 s -
1:1dual-endedswitching
Revertivemode
APSprotocol
AutomaticswitchingLockoutofswitchingForcedswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
0s to 10 s 5 minutes
6.2.6 PW APS ProtectionPW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PWfails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in twotypes: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
PW APS 1+1 ProtectionServices are transmitted to the working PW and protection PW at the source end and are receivedfrom the working PW at the sink end, generally. When the working PW is faulty, services arereceived from the protection PW. Figure 6-6 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1+1protection.
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 6-6 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection
Accessing
Data board
Switching
Data board
Converging
Data board
Switching
Data board
Subnet
Subnet
Service detection point Service detection pointWorkingchannel
Protection channel/Protocol channel
NE1 NE2
Basestation
PW APS 1:1 ProtectionServices are transmitted to the working PW at the source end and are received from the workingPW at the sink end, generally. When the working PW is faulty, services are transmitted to theprotection PW at the source end and are received form the protection PW at the sink end. Figure6-7 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection.
Figure 6-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection
Accessing
Data board
Switching
Data board
Converging
Data board
Switching
Data board
Subnet
Subnet
Service detection point Service detection pointWorkingchannel
Protection channel/Protocol channel
NE1 NE2
Basestation
Table 6-4 provides the parameters of PW APS protection.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-13
Table 6-4 Parameters of PW APS protection
SwitchingType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
Switching Mode
SwitchingDuration
SwitchingHold-OffTime
WTRTime
SwitchingCondition(Any of theFollowingConditionsTriggerstheSwitching)
1+11:1
RevertiveNon-revertive
APSprotocol
LockoutofprotectionForcedswitchingAutomaticswitchingManualswitchingExerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
0s to 10s 1 minuteto 12minutes
The boardhas ahardware orsoftwarefailure.A cold resetoccurs on theboard.A switchingcommand ismanuallyissued.The PWOAMmechanismdetects a PWfailure.
For details on PW APS protection, see the Feature Description.
6 Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
6-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
7 Product and Application Scenarios
About This Chapter
The OptiX 155/622H supports multiple networking modes on the dual domains. Hence, it canmeet the requirements of different application scenarios.
7.1 Basic Networking ModeWhen the OptiX 155/622H functions as the access equipment, it can construct hybrid networkswith Huawei Metro and OSN equipment series. The networking modes supported by the OptiX155/622H include the point-to-point, chain, ring, hub, and mesh.
7.2 Typical Networking Modes on the Packet DomainThe OptiX 155/622H can realize the function of the Ethernet services that are based on the packetmode on the TDM network.
7.3 Hybrid Networking with the OptiX PTN EquipmentThe OptiX 155/622H supports the E1 CES technology and therefore can be networked with theOptiX PTN equipment.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 Product and Application Scenarios
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
7.1 Basic Networking ModeWhen the OptiX 155/622H functions as the access equipment, it can construct hybrid networkswith Huawei Metro and OSN equipment series. The networking modes supported by the OptiX155/622H include the point-to-point, chain, ring, hub, and mesh.
The OptiX 155/622H supports 21.25 Gbit/s higher order cross-connections, and 5 Gbit/s lowerorder cross-connections. It can be configured as multiple terminal multiplexers (TMs), add/dropmultiplexers (ADMs), or multiple add/drop multiplexers (MADMs). It also supports servicegrooming and protection among multiple systems. In this manner, the networking capability andthe service grooming capability among networks are significantly improved.
7.2 Typical Networking Modes on the Packet DomainThe OptiX 155/622H can realize the function of the Ethernet services that are based on the packetmode on the TDM network.
Figure 7-1 shows a typical networking mode on the packet domain.
7 Product and Application Scenarios
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Figure 7-1 Typical networking mode on the packet domain
10GE ring
STM-16/64
Convergence node
OSN 3500OSN 3500
GE ring
OSN 1500/OptiX 155/622HBTS
BTS
Node B
FE
E1
E1
Access layer
Convergence/Core layer
Packet domain
TDM domain
STM-1/4
RNC BSC
OSN 3500
OSN 1500/OptiX 155/622H
The access layer, convergence layer, or core layer contains two independent domains, that is,the TDM domain and the packet domain. The access layer contains the TDM service ring(namely, the SDH ring. Its highest rate is STM-1/4) and the packet data service ring (namely,the GE ring). The convergence layer or core layer contains the TDM service ring (namely, theSDH ring. Its highest rate is STM-16/64) and the packet data service ring (namely, the 10GEring).
The E1 service at the access layer is mapped into the SDH ring at the access layer (that is, theSTM-1/4 service ring as shown in the figure) and then converged on the SDH ring (that is, theSTM-16/64 service ring as shown in the figure) at the convergence layer or the core layer throughthe convergence node.
The FE service at the access layer is converged on the packet data service ring at the access layer(that is, the GE ring as shown in the figure) and then converged on the packet data service ringat the convergence layer or the core layer (that is, the 10GE ring as shown in the figure) throughthe convergence node.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 Product and Application Scenarios
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
7.3 Hybrid Networking with the OptiX PTN EquipmentThe OptiX 155/622H supports the E1 CES technology and therefore can be networked with theOptiX PTN equipment.
Figure 7-2 shows hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment.
The FE/E1 services at the access layer are mapped onto the GE ring at the access layer (the GEring consists of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment), and then are converged tothe SDH ring (that is, the STM-16/STM-64 ring in the following figure) at the convergence/corelayer through aggregation nodes.
Figure 7-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX 155/622H and the OptiX PTN equipment
STM-16/STM-64 ring
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500
GE ring PTN 950/1900
PTN 910/950/1900
OptiX 155/622H
Node B
Node B
Node B
FE/E1
FE/E1
FE
RNC
7 Product and Application Scenarios
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 Product and Application Scenarios
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
8 Operation and Maintenance
About This Chapter
This topic describes the maintenance and network management capabilities of the OptiX155/622H.
8.1 DCN ManagementThe OptiX 155/622H supports the unified management of the outband DCN and inband DCN.By using different data transmission modes, the OptiX 155/622H supports the exchange of OAMinformation.
8.2 Network ManagementThe OptiX 155/622H is uniformly managed by the iManager U2000 transmission networkmanagement system (hereafter referred to as the U2000).
8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment MaintenanceThe OptiX 155/622H provides powerful maintenance functions. Therefore, the user canconveniently monitor, debug, and troubleshoot the equipment.
8.4 Power and Environment MonitoringThe OptiX 155/622H can monitor the power and environment.
8.5 Power Consumption ControlThe OptiX 155/622H supports the power consumption control function so that the user canmanage the power of the boards with high power consumption.
8.6 Equipment UpgradeThe OptiX 155/622H supports the in-service upgrade and loading of the board software and NEsoftware. In addition, it supports the remote loading of the board software and the fieldprogrammable gate array (FPGA) with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8.1 DCN ManagementThe OptiX 155/622H supports the unified management of the outband DCN and inband DCN.By using different data transmission modes, the OptiX 155/622H supports the exchange of OAMinformation.
When the OAM information of the OptiX 155/622H needs to be transparently transmitted bythe third-party equipment, or when the OptiX 155/622H needs to transparently transmit the OAMinformation of third-party equipment, the following mode can be adopted to realize hybridnetworking of the OptiX 155/622H and the third-party equipment:
On the TDM domain, services such as the SDH service and Ethernet service carried by the OptiX155/622H adopt the outband DCN networking mode. That is, non-service channels are used totransmit OAM information. On the packet domain, the Ethernet service carried by the OptiX155/622H adopts the inband networking mode. That is, service channels are used to transmitOAM information.
Outband DCN
The outband mode requires a dedicated communication channel and a maintenance channel thatis unrelated to the service channel. In outband networking mode, the NMS center can constructthe DCN network with the managed equipment in various manners, such as E1 private line andEthernet. The NMS manages the network in the management range through the DCN network.
Compared with the inband networking mode, the outband networking working mode providesa more reliable management channel. When faults occur in service channels, the user can obtainthe network management information in a timely manner and perform the real-time monitoring.
The outband DCN networking technologies supported by the OptiX 1555/622H are as follows:
l HW ECC
The data that complies with the HW ECC protocol is carried by the DCC bytes. The OptiX155/622H uses the regenerator section overhead bytes D1-D3 or the multiplex sectionoverhead bytes D4-D12 as the physical channel to process the OAM information of Huaweiequipment.
l IP over DCC
The OptiX 155/622H supports the IP over DCC. When the OptiX 155/622H, third-partyequipment, and the NMS all support IP, the OAM information can be transparentlytransmitted through the IP over DCC.
l OSI over DCC (TP4)
The OptiX 155/622H supports OSI over DCC (TP4). When the OptiX 155/622H, third-party equipment, and the NMS all support OSI over DCC (TP4), the OAM information canbe transparently transmitted through the OSI over DCC (TP4).
l Transparent transmission of the DCC bytes
The OptiX 155/622H can use the regenerator section overhead bytes D1-D3 as the physicalchannel to process the OAM information of Huawei equipment, and the multiplex sectionoverhead bytes D4-D12 as one or several channels to transparently transmit the OAMinformation of the third-party equipment. Or, the OptiX 155/622H can use the multiplexsection overhead bytes D4-D12 as the physical channel to process the OAM information
8 Operation and Maintenance
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
of Huawei equipment, and the regenerator section overhead bytes D1-D3 as one or severalchannels to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment.
l Management information transmission through the external clock interfaceWhen the D1-D3 bytes of the third-party equipment cannot transmit the OAM informationof the OptiX 155/622H, the external clock interface of the OptiX 155/622H can be usedinstead.
l SNMPThe OptiX 155/622H supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), and thusrealizes unified network management when equipment of multiple vendors form thenetwork.
Table 8-1 lists the DCC resources allocation modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 8-1 DCC resources allocation modes supported by the OptiX 155/622H
DCC ResourcesAllocation
Independent Mode Cooperative Mode
Channel type Supports both the D1-D3 and D4-D12 channel types.
Capability SS46SCB: Supports 40 D1-D3 channels, or 20 D1-D3channels and 6 D4-D12channels.SS49SCB: Supports 32 D1-D3 channels, or 12 D1-D3channels and 6 D4-D12channels.
Supports 19 D1-D3 channels,or 7 D1-D3 channels and 4D4-D12 channels.
The independent mode and the cooperative mode have different capacities of supporting theDCC resources allocation. Before changing the DCC mode, you need to check whether the newchannel mode can provide the required channel types and the number of channels. If not, youneed to delete the channels that do not meet the requirements before changing the channel mode.Otherwise, the NEs cannot normally communicate with each other.
CAUTIONWhen the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) is interconnected with the OptiX OSN 3500, the OptiXOSN 3500 does not support the D4-D12 channel type when the IP over DCC technology is used.Otherwise, communication is interrupted.
Inband DCNThe inband DCN mode does not require a dedicated DCN channel. In the inband DCN mode,the OAM information is considered as payload and is transmitted on the service channel.
The inband DCN mode features flexible networking that does not require additional equipment.
The inband DCN networking technologies supported by the OptiX 155/622H are as follows:
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
l HW ECC
l IP protocol
8.2 Network ManagementThe OptiX 155/622H is uniformly managed by the iManager U2000 transmission networkmanagement system (hereafter referred to as the U2000).
The U2000 provides management, maintenance and test functions for the entire opticaltransmission system in terms of faults, performance, configuration, and security, through the Qxinterface or human-machine language interface. The U2000 improves the network servicequality and reduces maintenance costs, thus ensuring reasonable utilization of networkresources.
The OptiX 155/622H provides management for the element management system (EMS), NMS,and LCT, and also provides serial port access management.
8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment MaintenanceThe OptiX 155/622H provides powerful maintenance functions. Therefore, the user canconveniently monitor, debug, and troubleshoot the equipment.
Alarm and Performance Managementl The SCB board provides audible and visual alarms in the case of an emergency, thus
assisting the network administrator in taking prompt measures.
l Provides the alarm input and output function, thus facilitating the collection of equipmentalarms.
l The running status indicator and alarm indicator are available on each board, thus assistingthe administrator in locating and handling faults promptly.
l Dynamically monitors the equipment operation and alarm status of all stations in thenetwork on the NMS.
Fault Locatingl The PDH processing boards support the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function, which can be used to remotely test bit errors.
l The NMS supports the 2M PRBS test function.
l Provides the press-to-collect function for collecting fault data, which shortens the datacollection time before the service recovery. You can collect the fault data selectivelyaccording to the actual conditions and can stop the collection process.
l Supports the loopback configuration on the port during the power-on process of theequipment, which meets the test requirement of one-time visit to the site.
l The service boards support inloop and outloop on ports.
l Provides the remote maintenance function. In case of an equipment fault, the maintenancepersonnel can remotely maintain the equipment through the public telephone network.
8 Operation and Maintenance
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
OAM Managementl Provides the Ethernet OAM function which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah.
l Supports the ATM OAM function.
l Supports the MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM.
Maintenancel Provides automatic shutdown function of the SDH single-mode optical interface.
l Provides the orderwire function for management personnel at different stations tocommunicate with each other.
l Supports the in-service upgrading and loading of the board software and NE software. Theequipment also supports the remote loading of the board software and FPGA with the error-loading-proof and resumable loading functions.
l Provides the network time protocol (NTP) function to realize synchronization among NEs.
l The NMS supports the fiber auto-discovery function.
l The NMS can display the interface impedance.
l Supports centralized equipment management through the software. After the board ispowered on, the board version matching is performed automatically.
l Supports the simulation package loading and simulation package diffusion functions.
l Supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM domain to the dual domains without a serviceinterruption.
l Supports diffServ based on MPLS. Supports the priority configuration based on tunnel.
l Supports the query of the power consumption of the equipment and the available power ofthe NE, and provides the automatic power consumption control function.
8.4 Power and Environment MonitoringThe OptiX 155/622H can monitor the power and environment.
The OptiX 155/622H provides -60 V DC and +24 V DC power interfaces and can measure theinput voltage and check the voltage status (severely undervoltage, undervoltage, overvoltage,and severely overvoltage).
By working with the 220 V assembly chassis, the OptiX 155/622H can access 220 V/110 V ACpower.
The OptiX 155/622H also provides the alarm input and alarm output functions. The alarm inputfunction can be used to remotely monitor the customer environment. The alarm output functioncan achieve centralized monitoring over all equipment alarms when the OptiX 155/622H isconnected to the alarm interface of the centralized cabinet.
8.5 Power Consumption ControlThe OptiX 155/622H supports the power consumption control function so that the user canmanage the power of the boards with high power consumption.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
When the maximum power consumption of an NE cannot meet the requirement of the actualconfiguration, the NE may fail to operate normally. The OptiX 155/622H supports the powerconsumption control function so that the equipment can operate normally.
The NE monitors the rest permissible power consumption in real time. When the powerconsumption reaches the maximum value or is close to the maximum value, the NE reports thecorresponding alarm to prompt the user to improve the allocation of power consumption.
When a new board is inserted, if the total power consumption of all the boards exceeds the powerconsumption threshold for the NE, the logical board of this new board cannot be added and thisboard cannot start working normally.
When the CXP board is started, the FE module and CES module are automatically shut downif the total power consumed by the NE exceeds the nominal value.
8.6 Equipment UpgradeThe OptiX 155/622H supports the in-service upgrade and loading of the board software and NEsoftware. In addition, it supports the remote loading of the board software and the fieldprogrammable gate array (FPGA) with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
The OptiX 155/622H supports the upgrade of the NE software through simulation packageloading and simulation package diffusion.
Simulation Package LoadingWhen you need to load the entire set of software to an NE, and the mapping between each boardand software on the NE is defined according to the simulation software package format, you canuse the function of simulation package loading to improve the loading efficiency.
The simulation software package contains the following software:
l The software that needs to be loaded to the NEl The package description file that defines the loading attributes of various software
The simulation package loading has the following features:
l Simplifying the upgrade operationl Improving the upgrade securityl Improving the upgrade efficiency
Simulation Package DiffusionIn simulation package diffusion, the software package to be loaded is diffused among NEsthrough an inter-NE diffusion protocol. The NEs in the entire network then try to download thesoftware package simultaneously. In this manner, the efficiency of software package loading ishighly improved, and less manual intervention and operations are required during this process.
The simulation package diffusion has the following features:
l Diffusing the software package layer by layer so that multiple NEs can download thesoftware package concurrently
l Sharing the network loadl Balancing the utilization of network bandwidth
8 Operation and Maintenance
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
NOTEThe simulation package diffusion is supported by OptiX 155/622H V300R007C01 and later.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
9 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
This topic provides the specifications related to the OptiX 155/622H.
9.1 General Specifications of the EquipmentThe general specifications of the equipment include the system specifications, transmissionperformance, and protection performance.
9.2 Specifications of Packet System PerformanceDifferent performance items for the OptiX 155/622H have different performance specifications.
9.3 Specifications of Optical InterfacesThe specifications of optical interfaces include the specifications of SDH optical interfaces andspecifications of Ethernet optical interfaces.
9.4 Specifications of the Electrical InterfaceThe OptiX 155/622H supports the PDH electrical interface and DDN interface.
9.5 Specifications of the Auxiliary InterfacesThis topic describes the timing and synchronous performance, and specifications of the clockinterfaces, the 64 kbit/s interfaces, the RS-232 interfaces, the RS-422 interfaces, and theorderwire phone interfaces.
9.6 Specifications of Ethernet FeaturesThis topic provides the specifications for testing Ethernet features.
9.7 Safety CertificationThis topic describes the related safety certifications that the OptiX 155/622H has passed.
9.8 Requirements for the EnvironmentThe OptiX 155/622H has different requirements for the environments for storage, transportation,and operation. This topic describes the requirements for these three types of environments.
9.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each BoardThis appendix provides the power consumption and weight of each board.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9.1 General Specifications of the EquipmentThe general specifications of the equipment include the system specifications, transmissionperformance, and protection performance.
9.1.1 System SpecificationsThe system specifications of the OptiX 155/622H include the weight, dimensions, and powerconsumption.
9.1.2 Transmission PerformanceThe transmission performance complies with ITU-T Recommendations.
9.1.3 Protection PerformanceThe protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
9.1.4 Environmental SpecificationsThe equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
9.1.5 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThe OptiX 155/622H is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standardsstipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)related tests.
9.1.1 System SpecificationsThe system specifications of the OptiX 155/622H include the weight, dimensions, and powerconsumption.
Table 9-1 provides the weight, dimensions, and power consumption of the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-1 Weight, dimensions and power consumption
EquipmentName
MaximumPowerConsumption
Maximum Weight
Dimensions
OptiX155/622H
100 W 10 kg 436 mm (W) x 293 mm (D) x 86 mm (H)
NOTE
If the power consumption of the hardware configuration exceeds 100 W, the system may become unstable.
9.1.2 Transmission PerformanceThe transmission performance complies with ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 9-2 lists the transmission performance.
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-2 Transmission performance
Performance Description
Jitter at STM-N interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783
Bit error Compliant with ITU-T G.826
9.1.3 Protection PerformanceThe protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
Linear MSP
Table 9-3 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 9-3 Linear MSP parameters
ProtectionType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
SwitchingTime
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition
1+1 single-endedswitching
Non-revertive
Notrequired
≤ 50 ms - Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOCl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SD
(optional)l Forced
switchingl Manual
switchingl Exercise
switching
1+1 single-endedswitching
Revertive Notrequired
≤ 50 ms 600s
1+1 dual-endedswitching
Non-revertive
APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms -
1+1 dual-endedswitching
Revertive APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
1:N dual-endedswitching
Revertive APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
MSP Ring
Table 9-4 lists the MSP ring parameters.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
Table 9-4 MSP ring parameters
Protection Type
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
SwitchingMode
SwitchingTime
Default WTRTime
SwitchingCondition
Two-fiberbidirectional MSP
Revertive
APSprotocol
l Forcedswitching
l Manualswitching
l Exerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
600s Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOCl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SDl Forced
switchingl Manual
switchingl Exercise
switching
Two-fiberunidirectional MSP
Revertive
APSprotocol
l Forcedswitching
l Manualswitching
l Exerciseswitching
≤ 50ms
600s
SNCP
Table 9-5 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 9-5 SNCP parameters
Protection Type
RevertiveMode
Switching Time
DefaultWTR Time
Switching Conditions
SNCP Revertive ≤50 ms 600s Any of the following alarmstriggers the switching of VC4 levelSNCP:l R_LOSl R_LOFl R_LOCl MS_AISl B2_EXCl AU_AISl AU_LOPl B3_EXC (Optional)l B3_SD (Optional)l HP_UNEQ (Optional)
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Protection Type
RevertiveMode
Switching Time
DefaultWTR Time
Switching Conditions
Non-revertive
≤50 ms - l HP_TIM (Optional)Any of the following alarmstriggers the switching of VC3 levelSNCP:l TU_LOPl TU_AISl B3_EXC (Optional)l B3_SD (Optional)Any of the following alarmstriggers the switching of VC12level SNCP:l TU_LOPl TU_AISl BIP_EXC (Optional)l BIP_SD (Optional)
9.1.4 Environmental SpecificationsThe equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in the long term in the environment defined in Table9-6.
Table 9-6 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Specifications Description
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0°C to 45°C
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
Specifications Description
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismicperformance
Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
9.1.5 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThe OptiX 155/622H is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standardsstipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)related tests.
Table 9-7 lists the specifications of the electromagnetic compatibility test for the OptiX155/622H.
Table 9-7 Specifications of the electromagnetic compatibility test
Test Item Standard Compliance
Conducted emission EN55022
Electrostatic discharge EN61000-4-2
Inject current immunity ENV50141
Immunity to radiatedelectrostatic fields
ENV50140
9.2 Specifications of Packet System PerformanceDifferent performance items for the OptiX 155/622H have different performance specifications.
Table 9-8 lists the system performance specifications of the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-8 Functional features of the CXP board
Functional Feature Description
Number of FE electrical interfaces 4
Number of FE optical interfaces 2
Number of GE optical interfaces 4
Connector RJ-45 LC
Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX,1000Base-SX/LX/VX/ZX
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Functional Feature Description
Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP opticalmodule.Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10km, 40 km, or 80 km through the opticalinterfaces.Supports the colored optical interface.
Working mode FE electricalinterfaces
Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex
FE optical interface 100M full-duplex
GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex
Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at theEthernet port.
l Supports the settings of loop mode, queryof port status, query of optical interfacetype, and others.
Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port.l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet
port.
Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function.Supports the frame encapsulation formatsthat comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports ajumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600bytes.
Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service.l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr
service.
QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities,including the simple flow classification andcomplex flow classification of the VLANpacket and MPLS packet, and the bandwidthlimit function.
Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supportsup to eight LAG members.
Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1protection.
l Supports the MPLS PW 1+1/1:1protection.
l Supports the LAG protection.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
Functional Feature Description
Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock.l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant
time synchronization.
Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults byproviding alarms and performance eventsto facilitate management and maintenanceof the equipment. These alarms andperformance events are related to theEthernet interface connection failure,installation of an improper opticalmodule, and shut-down of laser.
l Supports the hot swapping of opticalmodule and query of optical module.
l Supports the RMOM counting function.l Supports the warm reset and cold reset.
MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies withITU-T Y.1711.
ETH-OAM Supports the ETH-OAM that complies withIEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah.
VLAN tags Each port supports 4K VLAN tags.
Number of traffic classes supported by thesystem
1024
ETH OAM instances supported by the system 256
Number of E-line services 1024
Number of E-Aggr services 4
E1 CES 16
Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnelsValue range of the label: 16 to 32K
Number of static PWs 512Value range of the label: 16 to 32K
PW OAM Supports the PW OAM that complies withITU-T Y.1711.
Number of QinQ links 1024
Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protectiongroups and number of MPLS PW 1+1/1:1protection groups
The maximum sum of the number of MPLStunnel protection groups and the number ofMPLS PW protection groups is 128.
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Functional Feature Description
WARNINGMPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label mustbe different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range(16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time.
On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be aconsecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.
9.3 Specifications of Optical InterfacesThe specifications of optical interfaces include the specifications of SDH optical interfaces andspecifications of Ethernet optical interfaces.
NOTETo provide effective precaution, on the NMS, the lower threshold of the input optical power of the boardis set to more than the receiver sensitivity and the higher threshold of the input optical power of the boardis set to less than the overload optical power.
9.3.1 SDH Optical InterfaceThe specifications of the optical interface include the specifications of STM-1, STM-4, andSTM-16 optical interfaces, permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface, and biterror tolerance at the optical output interface.
9.3.2 Ethernet Optical InterfacesThis topic describes the specifications of the Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.
9.3.3 Colored optical interfacesThis topic describes the specifications of the colored optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.
9.3.4 Wavelength ConfigurationsThis topic describes the wavelength configurations on the OptiX 155/622H.
9.3.1 SDH Optical InterfaceThe specifications of the optical interface include the specifications of STM-1, STM-4, andSTM-16 optical interfaces, permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface, and biterror tolerance at the optical output interface.
Specifications of the STM-1 Optical Interface
Table 9-9 lists the specifications of the STM-1 optical interface on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-9 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface
Item Unit Value
Nominal bit rate kbit/s 155520
Type of opticalinterface
- Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
Item Unit Value
Operatingwavelength range
nm 1261 to1360
1261 to1360
1280 to1335
1480 to1580
Type of optical fiber - Multi-mode SC
Single-mode SC/LC
Maximum RMSspectral width (σ)
nm 80 7.7 3 -
Maximum -20 dBspectral width
nm - - - 1
Minimum side modesuppression ratio
dB - - - 30
Maximum meanlaunched power
dBm -14 -8 0 0
Minimum meanlaunched power
dBm -19 -15 -5 -5
Minimum extinctionratio
dB 8.2 8.2 10 10
Attenuation range dB 0 to 7 0 to 12 10 to 28 10 to 28
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 25 96 246 -
Minimum opticalreturn loss of cable atS (including anyconnectors)
dB - - - 20
Maximum discretereflectance between Sand R
dB - - - -25
Minimum sensitivity dBm -23 -28 -34 -34
Minimum overload dBm -14 -8 -3 0
Maximum opticalpath penalty
dB 1 1 1 1
Maximumreflectance ofreceiver at R
dB - - - -25
Specifications of the STM-4 Optical InterfaceTable 9-10 lists the specifications of the STM-4 optical interface on the OptiX 155/622H.
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-10 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface
Item Unit Value
Nominal bit rate kbit/s 622080
Type of opticalinterface
- Ie-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Operatingwavelength range
nm 1261 to1360
1293 to1334/1274to 1356
1300 to1325/1296to 1300
1480 to1580
Type of optical fiber - Multi-mode SC
Single-mode SC/LC
Maximum RMSspectral width (σ)
nm 14.5 4/2.5 2.0/1.7 -
Maximum -20 dBspectral width
nm - - - < 1
Minimum side modesuppression ratio
dB - - - 30
Maximum meanlaunched power
dBm -8 -8 2 2
Minimum meanlaunched power
dBm -15 -15 -3 -3
Minimum extinctionratio
dB 8.2 8.2 10 10
Attenuation range dB 0 to 7 0 to 12 10 to 24 10 to 24
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 13 46/74 92/109 2400
Minimum opticalreturn loss of cable atS (including anyconnectors)
dB - - 20 24
Maximum discretereflectance between Sand R
dB - - -25 -27
Minimum sensitivity dm -23 -28 -28 -28
Minimum overload dBm -8 -8 -8 -8
Maximum opticalpath penalty
dB 1 1 1 1
Maximumreflectance ofreceiver at R
dB - - -14 -27
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
Specifications of the STM-16 Optical InterfaceTable 9-11 lists the specifications of the STM-16 optical interface on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-11 Specifications of the STM-16optical interface
Item Unit Value
Nominal bit rate kbit/s 2488320
Type of opticalinterface
- S-16.1
Operatingwavelength range
nm 1260 to 1360
Type of optical fiber - Single-mode LC
Maximum RMSspectral width (σ)
nm -
Maximum -20 dBspectral width
nm 1
Minimum side modesuppression ratio
dB 30
Maximum meanlaunched power
dm 0
Minimum meanlaunched power
dm -5
Minimum extinctionratio
dB 8.2
Attenuation range dB 0 to 12
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 1
Minimum opticalreturn loss of cable atS (including anyconnectors)
dB 24
Maximum discretereflectance between Sand R
dB -27
Minimum sensitivity dm -18
Minimum overload dm 0
Maximum opticalpath penalty
dB 1
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Item Unit Value
Maximumreflectance ofreceiver at R
dB -27
Permitted Frequency Deviation at the Optical Input InterfaceTable 9-12 lists the permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface on the OptiX155/622H.
Table 9-12 Permitted frequency deviation at the optical input interface
Item Value
Rate level of theoptical interface
STM-1 STM-4 STM-16
Standardspecification (ppm)
±20 ±20 ±20
Bit Rate Error Tolerance at the Optical Output InterfaceTable 9-13 lists the bit rate error tolerance at the optical output interface on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-13 Bit rate error tolerance at the optical output interface
Item Value
Rate level of theoptical interface
STM-1 STM-4 STM-16
Standardspecification (ppm)
±20 ±20 ±20
9.3.2 Ethernet Optical InterfacesThis topic describes the specifications of the Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.
On the OptiX 155/622H, the performance of the GE optical interfaces complies with IEEE802.3z and the performance of the FE optical interfaces complies with IEEE 802.3u. For details,see Table 9-14.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-13
Table 9-14 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H
Item Value
Interfacetype
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
100BASE-FX
15 km 40 km 80 km
Fibertype
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Linecodepattern
8B/10Bencodingsignal
8B/10Bencodingsignal
8B/10Bencodingsignal
8B/10Bencodingsignal
NRZ NRZ NRZ
Launched opticalpower(dBm)
-9.5 to-2.5
-9.5 to -3 -4.5 to 0 -2 to +5 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Operatingwavelength range(nm)
770 to860
1270 to1355
1270 to1355
1480 to1580
1261 to1360
1263 to1360
1480 to1580
Centralwavelength (nm)
850 1310 1310 1550 1310 1310 1550
Overload OpticalPower(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3 -8 -10 -10
Receiversensitivity (dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -22 -28 -34 -34
Minimumextinction ratio(dB)
9.5 9.5 9 9 8.2 10 10
Maximumtransmissiondistance(km)
0.5 15 40 80 15 40 80
9.3.3 Colored optical interfacesThis topic describes the specifications of the colored optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-15 lists the performance specifications of the GE colored optical interfaces on the OptiX155/622H.
Table 9-15 Performance specifications of the GE optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 1.25 Gbit/s
Operating wavelengthrange (nm)
1471-1611
Launched optical power(dBm)
0-5
Receiver sensitivity(dBm)
-19
Minimum overload(dBm)
-3
Minimum extinctionratio (dB)
9
Side mode suppressionratio (dB)
30
Maximum receiver R-point reflectance (dBm)
-27
Maximum transmissiondistance (km)
80
9.3.4 Wavelength ConfigurationsThis topic describes the wavelength configurations on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-16 lists the wavelength configurations of the colored optical interfaces.
Table 9-16 Wavelength configurations of the GE colored optical interfaces
No. Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
1 20.22 1471
2 19.97 1491
3 19.72 1511
4 19.47 1531
5 19.22 1551
6 18.97 1571
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-15
No. Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)
7 18.72 1591
8 18.47 1611
9.4 Specifications of the Electrical InterfaceThe OptiX 155/622H supports the PDH electrical interface and DDN interface.
9.4.1 PDH Electrical InterfaceThe specifications of the electrical interface include the bit rate error tolerance at the electricaloutput interface, permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface, permitted frequencydeviation at the electrical input interface, and anti-interference capability of the electrical inputinterface.
9.4.2 DDN InterfaceThe OptiX 155/622H supports DDN interfaces.
9.4.3 Ethernet Electrical InterfaceFeatures of the Ethernet electrical interface mainly refer to the electrical interface features ofthe Ethernet board.
9.4.1 PDH Electrical InterfaceThe specifications of the electrical interface include the bit rate error tolerance at the electricaloutput interface, permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface, permitted frequencydeviation at the electrical input interface, and anti-interference capability of the electrical inputinterface.
Bit Rate Error Tolerance at the Electrical Output Interface
Table 9-17 lists the bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface on the OptiX155/622H.
Table 9-17 Bit rate error tolerance at the electrical output interface
Item Value
Interface type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Specification(ppm)
±32 ±50 ±20 ±20
Permitted Attenuation at the Electrical Input Interface
Table 9-18 lists the permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface on the OptiX 155/622H.
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-18 Permitted attenuation at the electrical input interface
Item Value
Interface type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Specification(dB)
Not specified 0 to 6 0 to 12 Not specified
Permitted Frequency Deviation at the Electrical Input InterfaceTable 9-19 lists the permitted frequency deviation at the electrical input interface on the OptiX155/622H.
Table 9-19 Permitted Frequency Deviation at the electrical input interface
Item Value
Interface type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Specification(ppm)
±50 ±50 ±20 ±20
Anti-Interference Capability of the Electrical Input InterfaceTable 9-20 lists the specifications of the anti-interference capability of the electrical inputinterface on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-20 Anti-interference capability of the electrical input interface
Item Value
Interface type 2048 kbit/s 1544 kbit/s 34768 kbit/s
Specification (SNR) ≥ 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≥ 20 dB
9.4.2 DDN InterfaceThe OptiX 155/622H supports DDN interfaces.
Table 9-21 lists the specifications of DDN interfaces.
Table 9-21 Specifications of DDN interfaces
Interface Type Description Standard
Framed E1interface
Framed E1 signal Physical and electrical characteristicscomply with ITU-T G.703. The framestructure complies with ITU-T G.704.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-17
Interface Type Description Standard
Nx64 kbit/sinterface
V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 interface Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A andRS-422A).
RS-530 interface Complies with EIA RS-530.
RS-530A interface Complies with EIA RS-530A.
9.4.3 Ethernet Electrical InterfaceFeatures of the Ethernet electrical interface mainly refer to the electrical interface features ofthe Ethernet board.
Table 9-22 lists the specifications of the electrical interface on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-22 Specifications of the electrical interfaces
Interface Type Line Code
10BASE-T Manchester coding signals
100BASE-TX Manchester coding signals
9.5 Specifications of the Auxiliary InterfacesThis topic describes the timing and synchronous performance, and specifications of the clockinterfaces, the 64 kbit/s interfaces, the RS-232 interfaces, the RS-422 interfaces, and theorderwire phone interfaces.
9.5.1 Specifications of the Clock InterfaceThe specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
9.5.2 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX 155/622H complies with ITU-T G.813.
9.5.3 64 kbit/s InterfaceThe specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
9.5.4 RS-232 InterfaceThe specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
9.5.5 RS-422 InterfaceThe specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
9.5.6 Orderwire Interface
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
The specifications of the orderwire interface comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
9.5.1 Specifications of the Clock InterfaceThe specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
Table 9-23 lists the specifications of the clock interface.
Table 9-23 Specifications of the clock interface
Parameter Description
Outputfrequencyaccuracy
Complies with ITU-T G.813.
Output jitter 0.05 UIpp (The test filter bandwidth is 20 Hz-100 kHz.)
Table 9-24 lists the specifications of the clock interface over the synchronous Ethernet.
Table 9-24 Specifications of the clock interface over the synchronous Ethernet
Parameter Description
Outputfrequencyaccuracy
Complies with ITU-T G.8262.
Output jitter 1.5 UIpp (The test filter bandwidth is 5 kHz-20 MHz.)
9.5.2 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX 155/622H complies with ITU-T G.813.
Table 9-25 lists the timing and synchronization performance.
Table 9-25 Timing and Synchronization Performance
Performance Description
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.813.
Output frequency (in free-run mode) Complies with ITU-T G.813.
Long-term phase variation (in locked mode) Complies with ITU-T G.813.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-19
Table 9-26 lists the timing and synchronization performance of IEEE 1588 V2 clocksynchronization.
Table 9-26 Timing and synchronization performance of IEEE 1588 V2 clock synchronization
Parameter Description
Precision of a single station ±30 ns
Precision of 20 stations ±1 us
9.5.3 64 kbit/s InterfaceThe specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
Table 9-27 lists the specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface.
Table 9-27 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate 64 kbit/s
Timing signals From RX
Coding style Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Output pulse waveform Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Output interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Input interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
9.5.4 RS-232 InterfaceThe specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
Table 9-28 lists the specifications of the RS-232 interface.
Table 9-28 Specifications of the RS-232 interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate ≤19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels ±5 V to ±15 V
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
9.5.5 RS-422 InterfaceThe specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
Table 9-29 lists the specifications of the RS-422 interface.
Table 9-29 Specifications of the RS-422 interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate ≤19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels ±2.0 V
9.5.6 Orderwire InterfaceThe specifications of the orderwire interface comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 9-30 list the specifications of the orderwire interface.
Table 9-30 Specifications of the orderwire interface
Specifications Description
Speech channel interface -
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz-3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain -4/0/0 dB
Output gain 0/-7/0 dB
Signalling DTMF complying with ITU-T Rec. Q.23
Analog EOW extension -
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz-3400 Hz
Tx level -3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr
Rx level -3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr
9.6 Specifications of Ethernet FeaturesThis topic provides the specifications for testing Ethernet features.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-21
Table 9-31 and Table 9-32 list the test specifications of major Ethernet features.
Table 9-31 Test specifications of the single-port 10M bidirectional full-duplex feature
Item Value
Number of boundVC-12s
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Packet length (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518
Testresult
Throughputa
≥95%
≥95%
≥95%
≥95%
≥90%
≥90%
≥90%
Delayb ≤ 500µs
≤ 500µs
≤ 500µs
≤ 700µs
≤ 700µs
≤ 700µs
≤ 700µs
Ratio offrame lossc
< 5% < 5% < 5% < 10% < 10% < 10% < 10%
Table 9-32 Test specifications of the single-port 100M bidirectional full-duplex feature
Item Value
Number of boundVC-12s
48 48 48 48 48 48 48
Packet length (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518
Testresult
Throughputa
≥95%
≥95%
≥95%
≥90%
≥90%
≥ 90% ≥88%
Delayb ≤ 500µs
≤ 500µs
≤ 500µs
≤ 700µs
≤ 700µs
≤ 700µs
≤ 700µs
Frame lossratioc
< 5% < 5% < 5% < 10% < 10% < 10% < 12%
a: This refers to the maximum frame rate that the system can bear when no frames are lost.
b: This refers to the interval that begins when the last bit of the input frame enters the input portand ends when the first bit of the output frame appears at the output port.
c: This refers to the ratio of the frames that should be forwarded (but are not forwarded due toinsufficient resources) to total frames when the interface rate is constant.
9.7 Safety CertificationThis topic describes the related safety certifications that the OptiX 155/622H has passed.
Table 9-33 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX 155/622H has passed.
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-33 Safety certifications
Item Standard
Safety IEC 60950-1IEC/EN41003EN 60950-1UL 60950-1CSA C22.2 No 60950-1AS/NZS 60950-1BS EN 60950-1IS 13252GB4943
Laser safety FDA rules21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11IEC60825-1IEC60825-2EN60825-1EN60825-2GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline1999-519-ECEN 50385OET Bulletin 65IEEE Std C95.1
Environmentprotection
RoHS
9.8 Requirements for the EnvironmentThe OptiX 155/622H has different requirements for the environments for storage, transportation,and operation. This topic describes the requirements for these three types of environments.
9.8.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for storage.
9.8.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for transportation.
9.8.3 Environment for OperationThe OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for operation.
9.8.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for storage.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-23
Climate
Table 9-34 lists the requirements on the climate for storage.
Table 9-34 Requirements on the climate for storage
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 5000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity 10% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed ≤ 30 m/s
Biological Environmentl Avoid reproduction of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Protect the storage environment against rodents.
Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.
l Table 9-35 lists the density requirements on the mechanically active substances in thestorage environment.
l Table 9-36 lists the density requirements on the chemically active substances in the storageenvironment.
Table 9-35 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the storageenvironment
Mechanical ActiveSubstance
Content
Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2.h
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-36 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the storage environment
Chemical ActiveSubstance
Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 9-37 lists the requirements on the mechanical stress in the storage environment.
Table 9-37 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the storage environment
Item Sub-Item Range
Sinusoidalvibration
Displacement ≤ 7.0 mm -
Acceleration - 20.0 m/s2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Unsteady stateimpact
Impulse responsespectrum II
250 m/s2
Static load ≤ 5 kPa
NOTEThe impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generatedby the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.
Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6ms.
Static load refers to the pressure from the top, which the equipment in package can bear in the normalpile-up mode.
9.8.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for transportation.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-25
ClimateTable 9-38 lists the requirements on the climate for transportation.
Table 9-38 Requirements on the climate for transportation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 5000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate ≤3°C/min
Relative humidity 10% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed ≤ 30 m/s
Biological Environmentl Avoid reproduction of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.l Protect the transportation environment against rodents.
Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.l Table 9-39 lists the density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the
transportation environment.l Table 9-40 lists the density requirements on the chemically active substances in the
transportation environment.
Table 9-39 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the transportationenvironment
Mechanical ActiveSubstance
Content
Suspending dust No requirement
Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2.h
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Table 9-40 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the transportationenvironment
Chemical ActiveSubstance
Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical StressTable 9-41 lists the requirements on the mechanical stress in the transportation environment.
Table 9-41 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the transportation environment
Item Sub-Item Range
Sinusoidalvibration
Displacement ≤ 7.5mm
- -
Acceleration - ≤ 20.0 m/s2 ≤ 40.0 m/s2
Frequencyrange
2 Hz to 9Hz
9 Hz to 200Hz
200 Hz to 500 Hz
Randomvibration
Accelerationspectral density
10 m2/s3 3 m2/s3 1m2/s3
Frequencyrange
2 Hz to 9Hz
9 Hz to 200Hz
200 Hz to 500 Hz
Unsteady stateimpact
Impulseresponsespectrum II
300 m/s2
Static load ≤ 10 kPa
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-27
Item Sub-Item Range
NOTEThe impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generatedby the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.
Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6ms.
Static load refers to the pressure from the top, which the equipment in package can bear in the normalpile-up mode.
9.8.3 Environment for OperationThe OptiX 155/622H has various requirements on the environment for operation.
Climate
The requirements on the climate for the operation of the OptiX 155/622H are as follows:
l Table 9-42 lists the requirements on the temperature and relative humidity.l Table 9-43 lists other requirements on the climate.
Table 9-42 Requirements on the temperature and relative humidity
EquipmentName
Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-TermOperation
Short-TermOperation
Long-TermOperation
Short-TermOperation
OptiX 155/622H 0°C to 45°C -5°C to 55°C
10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTEThe temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in frontof the equipment.
Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 9-43 Other requirements on the climate
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature change rate ≤ 5°C /h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Item Range
Wind speed ≤ 1 m/s
Biological Environmentl Avoid reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.l Protect the operation environment against rodents.
Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.l Table 9-44 lists the density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the
operation environment.l Table 9-45 lists the density requirements on the chemically active substances in the
operation environment.
Table 9-44 Density requirements on the mechanically active substances in the operationenvironment
MechanicalActiveSubstance
Content
Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105/m3
Suspending dust ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 15 mg/m2.h
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3
Table 9-45 Density requirements on the chemically active substances in the operationenvironment
Chemical ActiveSubstance
Content
SO2 ≤ 0.20 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.006 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-29
Chemical ActiveSubstance
Content
O3 ≤ 0.005 mg/m3
CO ≤ 5.0 mg/m3
Mechanical StressTable 9-46 lists the requirements on the mechanical stress in the operation environment.
Table 9-46 Requirements on the mechanical stress in the operation environment
Item Sub-Item Range
Sinusoidalvibration
Displacement ≤ 3.5 mm -
Acceleration - ≤ 10.0 m/s2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Unsteady stateimpact
Impulse responsespectrum II
≤ 100 m/s2
Static load 0
NOTEThe impulse response spectrum refers to the maximum response curve of the acceleration generatedby the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.
Impulse response spectrum II indicates that the duration of half-sine impulse response spectrum is 6ms.
Static load refers to the pressure from the top, which the equipment in package can bear in the normalpile-up mode.
9.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each BoardThis appendix provides the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 9-47 provides the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 9-47 Power consumption and weight of each board
Board Power Consumption(W)
Weight (kg)
OI16D - -
OI4 9 0.2
OI4D 11 0.2
OI2S 10 0.21
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Board Power Consumption(W)
Weight (kg)
OI2D 10 0.22
SL1O 14 0.66
SL1Q 9 0.6
SB2D 11 0.2
SB2L 7 0.2
SB2R 7 0.2
SLE 9 0.21
SDE 10 0.22
SP1S 3.95 0.21
SP1D 5 0.24
SP2D 5 0.25
PD2S 11 0.54
PD2D 14.5 0.66
PD2T 18.5 0.77
SM1S 4 0.2
SM1D 4.5 0.22
PM2S 9 0.52
PM2D 10 0.64
PM2T 11 0.74
PE3S 7 0.28
PE3D 7 0.28
PE3T 7 0.28
PT3S 7 0.28
PT3D 7 0.28
PT3T 7 0.28
ET1 26.1 0.74
ET1O 26.1 0.74
ET1D 16 0.26
EF1 25 0.68
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Technical Specifications
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-31
Board Power Consumption(W)
Weight (kg)
EFT 8 0.26
ELT2 9 0.22
EGT 11 0.2
EFS 23 0.26
EFS4 10 0.3
EFSC 22 0.6
EGS 25 0.3
AIUD 23 0.66
AIUQ 25 0.68
N64 4 0.22
N64Q 5 0.20
FP2D 8.4 0.25
SHLQ 10 0.24
TDA 12 0.7
SS49SCB 21 0.8
SS46SCB 25 0.8
EMU 2.3 0.25
FAN 8.3 0.3
POI/POU 3.5 0.15
CXP 55 1.22
9 Technical Specifications
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
9-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
10 Energy Saving and SustainableDevelopment
About This Chapter
The OptiX 155/622H complies with RoHS directive (2002/96/CE) and WEEE directive(2002/95/CE).
10.1 Energy SavingThe OptiX 155/622H supports static energy saving and dynamic energy saving.
10.2 Sustainable DevelopmentThe OptiX 155/622H meets the requirements of sustainable development. All the componentsand packing units are designed in compliance with the associated standards for recycling.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-1
10.1 Energy SavingThe OptiX 155/622H supports static energy saving and dynamic energy saving.
Static Energy Saving
Regarding static energy saving, the OptiX 155/622H takes the following measures:
l Uses an easy scheme for board design.
l Uses the power module with high efficiency.
l Replaces the linear power supplies with switching power supplies.
l Uses the standard digital voltage.
l Provides a power switch for each NE. Thus, the power supply for the NE can be shut downmanually.
Dynamic Energy Saving
Energy saving (power down) design for boards:
l Idle buses are powered down. That is, the buses that are not configured with services andthe buses of the idle slots are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed.
l Idle optical ports are powered down. That is, idle optical ports of the line boards or databoards are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed.
Energy saving (power down) design for boards:
l The CES modules of the packet boards have the automatic shutdown function.
10.2 Sustainable DevelopmentThe OptiX 155/622H meets the requirements of sustainable development. All the componentsand packing units are designed in compliance with the associated standards for recycling.
l The OptiX 155/622H not only provides necessary packing materials, but also guaranteesthat the size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three timesthe size of the net equipment.
l The product is also designed for easy unpacking. For details about how to unpack theequipment, see the associated manual. In addition, all hazardous substances contained inpackaging decompose easily.
l Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment areprovided with standard labels for recycling.
l Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed byusing simple tools.
l All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain identificationinformation, such as silkscreens, is printed on the front panel or subrack.
10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
10-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
11 Standard Compliance
About This Chapter
This topic lists the standards that the OptiX 155/622H complies with.
11.1 ITU-T RecommendationsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
11.2 IEEE StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the IEEE standards.
11.3 IETF StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the IETF standards.
11.4 Environmental StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the environmental related standards.
11.5 Safety Compliance StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the safety compliance related standards.
11.6 Protection StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the protection related standards.
11.7 Relative Standards of the Packet ModeThis topic describes the relative standards of the packet mode on the OptiX 155/622H.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Standard Compliance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-1
11.1 ITU-T RecommendationsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode opticalfiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters ofoptical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmissionsystems
G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management informationmodel for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defectdetection and clearance criteria
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipmentfunctional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous DigitalHierarchy (SDH)
11 Standard Compliance
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
11-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Recommendation Description
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocksin synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy
G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on theSynchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to thesynchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy foruse on optical fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects.
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
I.630 ATM protection switching
ITU-T Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks.
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminalequipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz groupband circuits
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Standard Compliance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-3
Recommendation Description
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchangecircuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
11.2 IEEE StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the IEEE standards.
Table 11-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks-Amendment 4: ProviderBridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
IEEE 802.1d Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, andmanagement parameters for 10 Gbit/s operation
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, mediumattachment units, and repeater for 100 Mbit/s operation, type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater andmanagement parameters for 1000 Mbit/s operation
IEEE 1588 Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and controlsystems implemented with technologies
11 Standard Compliance
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
11-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
11.3 IETF StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the IETF standards.
Table 11-3 IETF standards
Standard Description
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
11.4 Environmental StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the environmental related standards.
Table 11-4 Environmental standards
Standard Description
IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing-Part 3: Background information-Subpart 3:Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature-Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 3: Classification ofgroups of environmental parameters and their severities-Section 1:Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 3: Classification ofgroups of environmental parameters and their severities-Section 3:Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3: Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:Physical Protection
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Standard Compliance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-5
11.5 Safety Compliance StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the safety compliance related standards.
Table 11-5 Safety compliance standards
Standard Description
EN60825-1 Information technology equipment-safety
EN60825-2 Information technology equipment-safety
IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment includingelectrical business equipment
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
11.6 Protection StandardsThe OptiX 155/622H complies with the protection related standards.
Table 11-6 Protection standards
Standard Description
IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 Protection of structures against lightning
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
11.7 Relative Standards of the Packet ModeThis topic describes the relative standards of the packet mode on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 11-7 Relative standards of the packet mode and their description
RelativeStandards of thePacket Mode
Description
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8031 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1561 Performance and availability parameters for MPLS networks
11 Standard Compliance
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
11-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
RelativeStandards of thePacket Mode
Description
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1 Application of MPLS in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
RFC 3031 MPLS architecture
RFC 3469 Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery
RFC 4220 Traffic engineering link management information base
RFC 4221 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview
RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocollabel switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378 A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations andmanagement (OAM)
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Standard Compliance
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-7
A Glossary and Acronyms
Terms and abbreviations are listed in an alphabetical order.
A.1 Numerics
A.2 A
A.3 B
A.4 C
A.5 D
A.6 E
A.7 F
A.8 G
A.9 H
A.10 I
A.11 J
A.12 L
A.13 M
A.14 N
A.15 O
A.16 P
A.17 Q
A.18 R
A.19 S
A.20 T
A.21 U
A.22 V
A.23 W
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
A.1 Numerics1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection
SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal ispermanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, thenormal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to thepermanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected trafficsignal to be provided.
100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.
100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area networkover two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair(STP) wire.
10BASE-T Defined in IEEE 802.3, it is an Ethernet specification that uses the twist pair with themaximum length of 100 meters at 10 Mbit/s for each network segment.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails andone protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
1PPS Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This isbecause 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does notprovide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as thereference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be usedon other interfaces for high precision timing.
3R Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.
A.2 AABR Available Bit Rate
AC Alternating Current
ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonalpolarizations between two adjacent communication channels.
Active/Standbyswitching of cross-connect board
If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-uprelation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connectboards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the activeboard, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the activecross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supplyfails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board canautomatically take the place of the active one.
add/drop multiplexer A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from theSTM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
ADM See optical add/drop multiplexing
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.
Administrative UnitGroup
One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payloadare termed an Administrative Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneousassembly of AU-3s or an AU-4.
Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCoreproduct. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
aging time N/A
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
Alarm A means of alerting the operator that specified abnormal condition exists.
Alarm automaticreport
When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then,an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.
alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm filtering The alarms are reported to the N2000 BMS, which decides whether to display and savethe alarms according to the filtering states of the alarms. The filtered alarms are notdisplayed and saved on the N2000 BMS, but still monitored.
alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the currentstatus of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When theorange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellowindicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator onthe front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro)
Alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
Alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can beused to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference.The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (notinverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarminversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion modeof NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whateverthe inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set toautomatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then thealarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port willautomatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has alreadybeen configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoidgenerating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When thealarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversionstatus of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
Alarm Masking Alarms are detected and reported to the N2000 UMS, and whether the alarm informationis displayed and stored is decided by the function of alarm masking. These alarms maskedare not displayed and stored on the N2000 UMS.
Alarm Severity Alarm severity is used to identify the impact of a fault on services. According to ITU-Trecommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor,Warning.
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Alarm suppression When alarms of various levels occur at the same time, certain lower-level alarms aresuppressed by higher-level alarms, and thus will not be reported.
ALS See Automatic laser shutdown
APS See Automatic Protection Switching
asynchronous Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.
AsynchronousTransfer Mode
A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channeldemand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of networkresources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byteheader.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC See Automatic Transmit Power Control
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU See Administrative Unit
AUG See Administrative Unit Group
auto-negotiation A mechanism that enables devices to negotiate the SPEED and MODE (duplex or half-duplex) of an Ethernet Link.
Automatic lasershutdown
A function that enables the shutdown of the laser when the optical interface board doesnot carry services or the fiber is faulty. The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) functionshortens the working time of the laser and thus extends the service life of the laser. Inaddition, the ALS prevents human injury caused by the laser beam.
Automatic ProtectionSwitching
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system todetect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover thetraffic.
Automatic TransmitPower Control
A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on thetransmit signal detected at the receiver.
A.3 Bbackplane A backplane is an electronic circuit board containing circuitry and sockets into which
additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged; in acomputer, generally synonymous with or part of the motherboard.
backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes ofdatabase recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to datasynchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BDI Backward Defect Indicator
BER See Bit Error Rate
Binding strap A component installed on two sides of the cabinet for binding various cables.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparentpolypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-5
BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit codeis generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in sucha manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bitsequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity overthe second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity isgenerated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitoredpartition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bitposition within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The coveredportion includes the BIP-X.
bit error An error that occurs in some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged,and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information
Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index usedto measure the communications quality of a network.
BITS See Building Integrated Timing Supply
bound path Binding several seriel paths into a parallel path, thus improving the data throughputcapacity.
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridgesoperate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridgesstore and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals.Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IPaddresses.
broadcast The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports ofthe nodes in the network can receive packets.
Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.
BSC Base Station Controller
BSS Base Station Subsystem
Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to theOSN series . That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
Building IntegratedTiming Supply
A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links enteringan office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
BWS Backbone WDM System
A.4 Ccabling The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or
twisted together.
cabling aperture A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
Cabling frame The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.
cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses butare more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to thefirewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.
CAR See committed access rate
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CBR See Constant Bit Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM Continuity Check Message
CDR Clock and Data Recovery
CDVT See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Cell Delay VariationTolerance
This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressivesending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does notapply to end-systems.
Centralized alarmsystem
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
CFM Connectivity Fault Management
Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three.The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
CIR Committed Information Rate
Circuit The circuit of the service port on the access device.
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
class of service Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to classify services into differentcategories according to the service quality.
Class of Service Class of Service is abbreviated to CoS. CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packetsaccording to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different prioritiesfor them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to theirpriorities.
client A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.
Clock Synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signalfrequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.
CLP Cell Loss Priority
CM See Configuration Management
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-7
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.
Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Configuration Data A command file for an NE which defines the configuration of the NE hardware. Withthe file, the NE can coordinate with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration datais the key factor for the normal running of the entire network.
ConfigurationManagement
In a network, a system for gathering current configuration information from all nodes ina LAN.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network serviceefficiency.
Connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is boundto the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to theinput of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point ischaracterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection pointis formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transferscells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that dependon precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
convergence It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specificrouting protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one orseveral channels of required signals.
Convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide forthe specific requirements of the convergence service user.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transformsparts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters aprobe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.
corrugated tube N/A
CoS See class of service
CoS See Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check
current alarm An alarm in unrecovered and unacknowledged state, unrecovered and acknowledgedstate, or recovered and unacknowledged state. Treatment measures must be taken onthese alarms.
Current PerformanceData
Performance data stored in the current register. An NE provides two types registers foreach performance parameter of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are 15-minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to accumulate the performance datawithin the current monitoring period.
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Cyclic RedundancyCheck
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values. Communicationsprotocols such as XMODEM and Kermit use cyclical redundancy checking.
A.5 DDC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF See Digital Distribution Frame
DDN Digital Data Network
Defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
demultiplexing To separate from a common input into several outputs. Demultiplexing occurs at manylevels. Hardware demultiplexes signals from a transmission line based on time or carrierfrequency to allow multiple, simultaneous transmissions across a single physical cable.
Device set It is an aggregate of multiple managed equipments. Device set facilitates the authoritymanagement on devices in the management domain of the U2000. If some operationauthorities over one device set are assigned to a user (user group), these operationauthorities over all devices of the device set are assigned to the user (user group), thuseliminating the need to set the operation authorities over these devices respectively. It issuggested to design device set according to such criteria as geographical region, networklevel, device type, etc.
differentiated servicescode point
Values for a 6-bit field defined for the IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that enhance classof service (CoS) distinctions in routers.
Differentiated ServicesCode Point
Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various servicestreams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHBaccording to the DSCP value.
DiffServ Differentiated Services
Digital DistributionFrame
Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-9
digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states—forexample, high and low voltages—rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream,as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHzsampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signalis also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structuresand broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected byexternal interference.
Distributed LinkAggregation Group
The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protectiontechnology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the servicescan automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for theinter-board ports.
DLAG See Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DNI See Dual Node Interconnection
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DQDB Distributed Queue Dual Bus
DSCP See differentiated services code point
DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSR Data Set Ready
DTE Data Terminal Equipments
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Dual NodeInterconnection
DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in caseof an interconnection failure scenario.
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
A.6 EE-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation
E-LAN Ethernet LAN
E-LAN A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains overthe PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2switch.
E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernetin different domains.
Ear bracket A component on the side of the subrack. It is used to install the subrack into a cabinet.
ECC See Embedded Control Channel
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
ElectroStatic Discharge A sudden flow of electric current through a material that is normally an insulator.
Embedded ControlChannel
An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a datacommunications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
EMS Element Management System
encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols to add header information and possibly tailinformation to the protocol data unit.
Enterprise SystemConnection
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
Entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or system that can be individuallyconsidered. For ETH-OAM, an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system orsubsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a Huawei Ethernet serviceprocessing board is an OAM entity.
EPL See Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN Service
ESCON See Enterprise System Connection
ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet Alarm Group The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with theconfigured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.
Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared betweendifferent customers.
Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
ethernet virtual privateline service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.
Exerciser - Ring This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel withoutcompleting the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses arechecked, but no working traffic is affected.
Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different networksegments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used forthe protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-11
A.7 FFailure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now beendetected.
Fairness For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets transmitted by the sourcenode are constrained by the fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certainbandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness.
fairness algorithm An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the caseof congestion or overloading.
fault An accidental condition that causes a functinal unit to fail to perform its requiredfunction.
FC Fiber Channel
FD See frequency diversity
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface
FDI Forward Defect Indicator
FE Fast Ethernet
feature code Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g. forwarding, using two or three digitcodes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).
FEC See forwarding equivalence class
FEC See Forward Error Correction
fiber A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.
Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units.It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, andprovides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).
fiber distributed datainterface
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications fortransmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based onthe token ring network.
fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physicalentities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (userinformation and network management information) and perform transmission functionin the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cabletransmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiberconnection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEsrepresents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of opticalfiber type.
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
FICON See Fiber Connect
FIFO First In First Out
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the U2000 or NEsoftware, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets thathave the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow isbased on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.
Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protectionchannel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardlessof the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boardsare satisfying a higher priority bridge request.
Forward ErrorCorrection
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.
forwarding equivalenceclass
A term used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to describe a set of packets withsimilar or identical characteristics which may be forwarded the same way; that is, theymay be bound to the same MPLS label.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.
Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced bythe oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In thismode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost externalreference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previouslyconnected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflectsthe influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminateswhen the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.Onthe communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.
A.8 GGain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,which expressed in dB.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-13
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be usedto enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is thegateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannotidentify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IPnetworks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of thenetwork and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
Gateway NetworkElement
Gateway NE refers to the NE that communicates with the NMS via Ethernet or serialport line. The non-gateway NE communicates with the gateway NE via ECC andcommunicates with the NMS via the gateway NE. The gateway NE is a communicationroute that the U2000 must pass through when managing the entire network. Thecommunication status between the gateway NE and the U2000 can be:(1) Normal: Thecurrent communication is efficient; (2) Connecting: The destination gateway responds,and the communication is interrupted but is being connected; (3) Disconnected: Thedestination gateway does not respond (Maybe the network cable is disconnected or notwithin the same network segment), and the communication is unreachable or the gatewayis disabled manually.
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GFP GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It hasbeen standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GNE See Gateway Network Element
GPS Global Positioning System
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI Graphic User Interface
A.9 Hhalf-duplex An operation mode of the Ethernet port. In half-duplex mode, a port can only send or
receive data at a time.
handle A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards and RTMs in and out ofslots.
Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interfaceto the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HEC Header Error Control
History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.
History PerformanceData
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is autoreported andstored in the NMS.
HP Higher Order Path
HPT Higher Order Path Termination
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
A.10 IIC Integrated Circuit
IDU Indoor Unit
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP Snooping IGMP proxy means that in some network topologies, the device does not set up themulticast routes, but to learn the information about the accessed multicast group membersand forward it to the upstream multicast router. The upstream multicast router sets upthe multicast routes.
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical framedefined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N linksin an IMA group.
Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, whenmodulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two erroredseconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30second measurement intervals.
Intelligent poweradjusting
The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and removal of connectors mayresult in the loss of the optical power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting(IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a section to be shut downautomatically. In this way, the maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected forthe exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs.
Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces andoptical interfaces within the cabinet.
Internet GroupManagement Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.
IP Internet Protocol
IP address In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the 32-bit address of thecommunication port, An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. AnIP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; forexample,192.168.7.27.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remoteNEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overheadDCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IPA See Intelligent power adjusting
IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-15
ISO International Standard Organization
ISP Internet Service Provider
IST Internal Spanning Tree
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization
A.11 JJitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
jitter tolerance Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied onthe input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the opticalequipment.
A.12 Llabel A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
Label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. A label is used to uniquelyidentify the FEC to which a packet belongs. A label does not contain topologyinformation. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topologyinformation.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchicallyas successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transferof its characteristic information.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LB See Loopback
LBM Loopback Message
LBR Loopback Reply
LC Lucent Connector
LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCT See Local craft terminal
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
License A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, anddurability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the licenseconsists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level oflicense.
Link In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection betweentwo topological nodes.
Link AggregationControl Protocol
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad)that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACPallows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.
Link CapacityAdjustment Scheme
The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamicprovisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.
LLC Logical Link Control
Local craft terminal A single layer network management scheme that manages a transmission networkconsisting of a maximum of five NEs. In this way, the comprehensive management ofthe multi-service transmission network is achieved. Normally, the cross-over networkcables and serial port cables are used to connect the local craft terminal (LCT) to an NE.Then, the LCT can configure and maintain a single NE.
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.
LOF Loss of frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOS Loss Of Signal
Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold.
LP Lower Order Path
LPT Link State Pass Through
LSP Label Switched Path
LSR Label Switching Router
LT Link Trace
A.13 MMA See Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-17
MaintenanceAssociation
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.
Maintenance Domain The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed,belonging to a single administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is definedby a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point of connectivity to a Service Instance.
MAN See Metropolitan Area Network
Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of ahigher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to theprotection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.
Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary ofan SDH network.
Marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installationholes for the cabinet.
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MCF Message Communication Function
MCR Minimum Cell Rate
MD See Maintenance Domain
Mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by thetransmitter.
MEP Maintenance End Point
Metropolitan AreaNetwork
A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computerresources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large localarea network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single largernetwork (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It isalso used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging themwith backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MIB Management Information Base
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point
MODEM MOdulator-DEModulator
MP Maintenance Point
MPID Maintenance Point Identification
MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSOH See Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
MSTP See Multi-service transmission platform
MSTP See Multiple spanning tree protocol
MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
Multi-Protocol LabelSwitch
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multi-servicetransmission platform
It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDMservices, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management ofthese services.
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.
Multiple spanning treeprotocol
The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocksredundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. Theprotocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. Thissolves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiplex SectionOverhead
The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOHdefinition.
multiplex sectionprotection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higherorder path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplexsection.
A.14 NN+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiXequipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE,boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors theentire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment Network Segment means any discrete part of the Network.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-19
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS Network Management System
NNI See network node interface
NPC Network Parameter Control
nrt-VBR Non Real-Time Variable Bit Rate
NRZ Non Return to Zero code
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Protocol
A.15 OOA See Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
OAM auto-discovery In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernetin the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutualEFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAMprotocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the twoports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two portsregularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation.
OCP See Optical Channel Protection
ODF See Optical Distribution Frame
ODU Outdoor Unit
OFS Out-of-frame Second
OHA Overhead Access Function
OLT Optical Line Terminal
Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructionsfor using their features when so requested by the user.
ONU Optical Network Unit
OOF Out of Frame
optical add/dropmultiplexing
A process that adds the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and dropthe optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
Optical Amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of thestimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
Optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that theoptical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It isavailable in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
Optical ChannelProtection
In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certainwavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the opticalchannel protection is configured.
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Optical Connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purposeof providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
Optical DistributionFrame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Optical Interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
Optical Time DomainReflectometer
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication systemand measures the time history of the pulse reflection.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTDR See Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signalsinto the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire,for example, would be considered overhead information.
A.16 PPaired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed throughbetween the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDHboards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the Kbytes can be passed through.
pass through When services are passed through, it indicates that transmission equipment does notprocess the service received and only detects the signal quality.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left endof a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path isa certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in thenetwork management system, a user can test the performance of a network path betweena device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packetloss ratio or other aspects.
path protection Path protection is a special case of fixed partitioning sub-path protection technique whereevery primary path is partitioned into only one sub-path (i.e., h = D, diameter of thenetwork).
PBS Peak Burst Size
PC Personal Computer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCR Peak Cell Rate
PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-21
PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the providernetwork with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer.
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historyperformance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSESregister. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, soevery board functional module has a performance register. A performance register isused to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, soas to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
performance threshold The performance threshold is a limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. Whenthe measurement data satisfies the preset alarm threshold or exceeds the preset grads,the PM subsystem generates a performance alarm.
Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performanceevent count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing eventis generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold fora period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way,performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. A few performanceevents only have one threshold, which is the special case that upper threshold and lowerthreshold are equal.
Permanent VirtualConnection
Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual Connection that is established/released upon arequest initiated by a management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting theconnections need to be instructed by the network management).
PGND Protection Ground
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
plesiochronous Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which correspondingsignificant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained withinspecified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervalshaving durations which may vary without limit.
Plesiochronous DigitalHierarchy
The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used intelecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transportequipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio systems.
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect tothe frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
POS Packet Over SDH
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS See Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
PRC Primary Reference Clock
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Primitive In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services fromthe lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data isexchanged between the user and the service provider. In this case, the data transmittedbetween adjacent layers is called primitive.
Private Line The line, such as the subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are hired by thetelecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirement of the user. Theline is also called hired line. Generally, the switch device is not contained.
protection grounding A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, thecable is yellow and green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labelled protection.
Protection subnet In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other thanmultiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involvesNEs and fibre cable connections.
Protection View The user interface, of the network management system, which is used to manageprotection in the network.
PS Packet Switched
PSD Power Spectral Density
Pseudo-RandomBinary Sequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
PVC See Permanent Virtual Connection
PW Pseudo Wire
PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services between PEs on the PSN(Packet Switched Network).
A.17 QQoS See Quality of Service
Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoSis influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
A.18 RRapid Spanning TreeProtocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.
RDI Remote Defect Indication
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.
Reference clock A reference clock is usually of high stability , accuracy and autonomy and it's frequencycan be compared with other clock as a benchmark.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-23
REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
Regenerator sectionoverhead
The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal.
Remote opticalpumping amplifier(ROPA)
An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for applications where power supplyand monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensationsolution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
Resilient Packet Ring A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings.
RF Radio Frequency
RFA Request For Announcement
RFI Request for Information
ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two othernodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.
RNC Radio Network Controller
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
router Links a local network to a remote network. For example, your company's networkprobably uses a router to connect to the Internet. Can be used to connect a LAN to aLAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
RP Rendezvous Point
RPR See Resilient Packet Ring
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It cancommunicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and thetransmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digitalinterface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and othersare the same as RS232.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
RX Receiver
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
A.19 SS1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronizationof the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is lost, the clock ofthis NE will trace another clock reference source of lower level. To implement protectionswitching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock qualityinformation of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte totransmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits ofthe multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization qualitygrades. The specific coding information is shown in the following table. Auto protectionswitching of clocks in the synchronous network can be implemented by using S1 byteand following the certain switching protocol.
SAN Storage Area Network
SC Square Connector
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate
SD See space diversity
SD See Signal Degrade
SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDP Serious Disturbance Period
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
Section The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i)a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminatingpoint is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or maybe) done.
Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without theNMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is foundby the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at thattime.
Serial port extendedECC
The ECC channel realized by means of serial port.
server A network device that provides services to network users by managing shared resources,often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.
Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES Severely Errored Second
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
SF See Signal Fail
SF See SF
SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-25
SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SHDSL Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line
Side Mode SuppressionRatio
The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the totalsource spectrum to the second largest peak.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signalcable.
Signal Degrade SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degradeddefect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (not being the degraded defect) is active.
Simple NetworkManagement Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.
slide rail Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be supported within a cabinet orshelf.
Small Form-FactorPluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMSR See Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCMP See Subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SNCP node Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to support sub-network connectionprotection that spans protection sub-networks. The SNCP node of the ring sub-networkcan support electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring,thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SNCP node is generally seton the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectivelyreceived.
SNCTP See Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal Noise Ratio
space diversity A protection mode. The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, butare connected to their own antennas. Both antennas, separated by a specific distance, arereceiving the signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the lin
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths throughcertain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
SSU Synchronization Supply Unit
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
Sub-network number It is used to differentiate the different network sections in the sub-network conference.Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwirephone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number.
subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of networkmanagement objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.
Subnetwork connectionmultipath protection
The only difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection.That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.
SubNetworkConnection Protection
A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection ifthe working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.
SubnetworkConnection TunnelProtection
SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
Support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor
Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppressionstatus, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will notoccur even when the alarm conditions are met.
SVC Switching Virtual Connection
Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributaryboard switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set thesame, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higherpriority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Switching restorationtime
It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when theline is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSPsub-network.
Synchronization StatusMessage
A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronoustiming link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and thesynchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two performoperations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-27
Synchronous DigitalHierarchy
SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It definesthe transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would includeclocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
A.20 TT2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication
management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level andnetwork level, which can support all NE level functions and part of the network levelmanagement functions. See also NM.
T2000 LCT A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management system for the opticaltransmission network. It can manage SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmissionequipment. See also LCT.
Tandem ConnectionMonitor
In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU managementlayer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the qualityof the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
TCM See Tandem Connection Monitor
TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
tie wrap N/A
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are ableto interconnect.
Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that thesynchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signalskeeps consistent with the UTC time.
TM Terminal Multiplexer
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
ToS See Type of Service
TPS See Tributary Protection Switch
Trail managementfunction
A network level management function of the network management system. Through trailmanagement, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visualroutes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trailquickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms andperformance data by trail, and print a trail report.
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Transceiver A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits incommon, often for portable or mobile use.
Transmission ControlProtocol/InternetProtocol
Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction ofworldwide internetworks.
transparenttransmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content butencapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
Tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
Tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of thetributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes. 1. No loopback: It is the normalstatus. No loopback is needed when the equipment runs efficiently; 2. Outloop: Whenarriving at the line board after passing the input port in the local NE, the input signal isdirectly looped back to the service output end; 3. Inloop: The input signal is returnedalong the original trail from the tributary board of the target NE.
Tributary ProtectionSwitch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
Tributary unit An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layerand the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower orderVC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe higher order VC frame start.
Tributary Unit Group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way thatmixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructedto increase flexibility of the transport network
TTL Time To Live
TU Tributary Unit
TUG See Tributary Unit Group
Type of Service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used for quality of service (QoS). The TOSfield is 8 bits, broken into five sub-fields.
A.21 UUART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UAS Unavailable Second
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See User Network Interface
Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannotbe switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service isinterrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
Unprotected sub-network
It refers to a sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of suchconfiguration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for the subsequent trailmanagement.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-29
Upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the U2000. Theconfiguration data then covers the configuration data stored at the U2000 side.
Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
Upward cabling Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operationrights of a user in the NMS.
User Network Interface The interface between a network and the user of network services.
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
A.22 VVB Virtual Bridge
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VC See Virtual concatenation
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
Virtual concatenation N/A
Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connectionsin the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) informationfields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
Virtual local areanetwork
A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with eachVLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).
Virtual PrivateNetwork
The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, andauthenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provideremote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.
VLAN See Virtual local area network
VP Virtual Path
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VPN See Virtual Private Network
A.23 WWait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can
be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal trafficsignal from.
Wait-to-Restore A period of time that must elapse from a recovered fault before an LSP/span can be usedagain to transport the normal traffic and/or to select the normal traffic from.
WAN Wide Area Network
A Glossary and Acronyms
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission System
Product Description
A-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2010-10-20)
Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their idealposition in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than10Hz).
washer A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nutis screwed on.
Wavelength DivisionMultiplexing
Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics ofbroad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fibre, uses multiplewavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in asingle fibre.
Wavelength protectiongroup
The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protectionstructure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. Thewavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of thewavelength protection group.
WDM See Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing
Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WTR See Wait-to-Restore
WTR See Wait to Restore Time
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16MSTP Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Glossary and Acronyms
Issue 02 (2010-10-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-31